Escape Manual

Introduction 4
Instrument Cluster 10
W arning and controllights 10
G auges 15
Entertainment Systems 17
A M /FM stereo w ith in-dash six CD 17
A M /FM stereo w ith CD /M P3 26
A M /FM stereo cassette w ith CD 31
Climate Controls 38
H eater only 38
M anualheating and air conditioning 39
Rear w indow defroster 40
Lights 41
H eadlam ps 41
Turn signalcontrol 46
Bulb replacem ent 47
Driver Controls 52
W indshield w iper/w asher control 52
Steering w heeladjustm ent 53
Pow er w indow s 55
M irrors 57
Speed control 58
M essage center 62
Locks and Security 75
K eys 75
Locks 75
A nti-theft system 84
Table of Contents
1
2006 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints 89
Seating 89
Safety restraints 97
A irbags 112
Child restraints 127
Tires, Wheels and Loading 139
Tire Inform ation 141
Tire Inflation 143
Tire Pressure M onitoring System (TPM S) 156
Vehicle loading 162
Trailer tow ing 169
Recreationaltow ing 174
Driving 175
Starting 175
Brakes 178
Transm ission operation 182
Roadside Emergencies 200
G etting roadside assistance 200
H azard flasher sw itch 201
Fuelpum p shut-offsw itch 202
Fuses and relays 202
Changing tires 209
Lug N ut Torque 220
Jum p starting 220
W recker tow ing 226
Customer Assistance 228
Reporting safety defects (U .S.only) 234
Cleaning 235
Table of Contents
2
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications 242
E ngine com partm ent 244
E ngine oil 247
Battery 251
E ngine Coolant 253
Fuelinform ation 259
A ir filter(s) 273
Part num bers 275
Refillcapacities 276
Lubricant specifications 278
Accessories 285
Index 287
A llrights reserved.Reproduction by any m eans,electronic or m echanical
including photocopying,recording or by any inform ation storage and retrieval
system or translation in w hole or part is not perm itted w ithout w ritten
authorization from Ford M otor Com pany.Ford m ay change the contents w ithout
notice and w ithout incurring obligation.
Copyright 2005 Ford M otor Com pany
Table of Contents
3
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: E ngine exhaust,som e ofits constituents,and certain
vehicle com ponents contain or em it chem icals know n to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm .In
addition,certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of
com ponent w ear contain or em it chem icals know n to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm .
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford.Please take the tim e to get
w ellacquainted w ith your vehicle by reading this handbook.The m ore
you know and understand about your vehicle,the greater the safety and
pleasure you w illderive from driving it.
For m ore inform ation on Ford M otor Com pany and its products visit the
follow ing w ebsite:
In the U nited States:w w w.ford.com
In Canada:w w w.ford.ca
In A ustralia:w w w.ford.com .au
In M exico:w w w.ford.com .m x
A dditionalow ner inform ation is given in separate publications.
This Owners Gui de describes every option and m odelvariant available
and therefore som e ofthe item s covered m ay not apply to your
particular vehicle.Furtherm ore,due to printing cycles it m ay describe
options before they are generally available.
Rem em ber to pass on this Owners Gui de w hen reselling the vehicle.It
is an integralpart ofthe vehicle.
Fuel pumpshut-off switch: In the event ofan accident the
safety sw itch w illautom atically cut offthe fuelsupply to the
engine.The sw itch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision w hen parking).To reset the sw itch,refer to the Fuel pump
shut-off swi tch in the Roadsi de Emergenci es chapter.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
H ow can you reduce the risk ofpersonalinjury to yourselfor others? In this
guide,answ ers to such questions are contained in com m ents highlighted by
the w arning triangle sym bol.These com m ents should be read and observed.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Introduction
4
Warning symbols on your vehicle
W hen you see this sym bol,it is
im perative that you consult the
relevant section ofthis guide before
touching or attem pting adjustm ent
ofany kind.
Protecting the environment
W e m ust allplay our part in
protecting the environm ent.Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposalofw aste,cleaning and
lubrication m aterials are significant
steps tow ards this aim .Inform ation in this respect is highlighted in this
guide w ith the tree sym bol.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in.Try not to drive
continuously at the sam e speed for the first 1,000 m iles (1,600 km ) of
new vehicle operation.Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
m oving parts a chance to break in.
D rive your new vehicle at least 500 m iles (800 km ) before tow ing a
trailer.For m ore detailed inform ation about tow ing a trailer,refer to
Trai ler towi ng in the Ti res, Wheels and Loadi ng chapter.
D o not add friction m odifier com pounds or specialbreak-in oils during the
first few thousand m iles (kilom eters) ofoperation,since these additives
m ay prevent piston ring seating.See Engi ne oi l in the Mai ntenance and
Speci fi cati ons chapter for m ore inform ation on oilusage.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description ofw hat is covered and w hat is not covered by
your vehicles N ew Vehicle Lim ited W arranty,refer to the Warranty
Gui de that is provided to you along w ith your Owners Gui de.
Special instructions
For your added safety,your vehicle is fitted w ith sophisticated electronic
controls.
Please read the section Supplemental restrai nt system (SRS)
in the Seati ng and Safety Restrai nts chapter.Failure to follow
the specific w arnings and instructions could result in personalinjury.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Introduction
5
Front seat m ounted rear-facing child or infant seats should
NEVER be placed in front ofan active passenger airbag.
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable ofcollecting and
storing diagnostic inform ation about your vehicle.This potentially
includes inform ation about the perform ance or status ofvarious system s
and m odules in the vehicle,such as engine,throttle,steering or brake
system s.In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle,Ford
M otor Com pany,Ford ofCanada,and service and repair facilities m ay
access vehicle diagnostic inform ation through a direct connection to your
vehicle w hen diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
O ther m odules in your vehicle event data recorders are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event.The
recorded inform ation m ay assist in the investigation ofsuch an event.
The m odules m ay record inform ation about both the vehicle and the
occupants,potentially including inform ation such as:
how various system s in your vehicle w ere operating;
w hether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts w ere buckled;
how far (ifat all) the driver w as depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
how fast the vehicle w as traveling;and
w here the driver w as positioning the steering w heel.
To access this inform ation,specialequipm ent m ust be directly connected
to the recording m odules.Ford M otor Com pany and Ford ofCanada do
not access event data recorder inform ation w ithout obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or w here required by law enforcem ent,
other governm ent authorities or other third parties acting w ith law ful
authority.O ther parties m ay seek to access the inform ation
independently ofFord M otor Com pany and Ford ofCanada.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
U tility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types ofvehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle,please read this Owners Gui de carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car.A s w ith other vehicles ofthis type,
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Introduction
6
failure to operate this vehicle correctly m ay result in loss ofvehicle
control,vehicle rollover,personalinjury or death.
Be sure to read Dri vi ng off road in the Dri vi ng chapter.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Your vehicle is not equipped w ith a snow plow ing package.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped w ith the Ford A m bulance Preparation Package.
Cell phone use
The use ofM obile Com m unications E quipm ent has becom e increasingly
im portant in the conduct ofbusiness and personalaffairs.H ow ever,
drivers m ust not com prom ise their ow n or otherssafety w hen using
such equipm ent.M obile Com m unications can enhance personalsafety
and security w hen appropriately used,particularly in em ergency
situations.Safety m ust be param ount w hen using m obile com m unications
equipm ent to avoid negating these benefits.
M obile Com m unication E quipm ent includes,but is not lim ited to cellular
phones,pagers,portable em aildevices,in-vehicle com m unications
system s,telem atics devices and portable tw o-w ay radios.
A drivers first responsibility is the safe operation ofthe vehicle.
The m ost im portant thing you can do to prevent a crash is to
avoid distractions and pay attention to the road.W ait untilit is safe to
operate M obile Com m unications E quipm ent.
Middle East/North Africa vehicle specific information
For your particular globalregion,your vehicle m ay be equipped w ith
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owners Gui de; therefore,a supplem ent has been supplied that
com plem ents this book.By referring to the pages in the provided
supplem ent,you can properly identify those features,recom m endations
and specifications that are unique to your vehicle.Refer to this
Owners Guide for all other requiredinformation andwarnings.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Introduction
7
These are som e ofthe sym bols you m ay see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety A lert See O w ners G uide
Fasten Safety Belt A irbag - Front
A irbag - Side Child Seat
Child Seat Installation
W arning
Child Seat Low er
A nchor
Child Seat Tether
A nchor
Brake System
A nti-Lock Brake System
Brake Fluid -
N on-Petroleum Based
Pow ertrain M alfunction Speed Control
M aster Lighting Sw itch H azard W arning Flasher
Fog Lam ps-Front Fuse Com partm ent
FuelPum p Reset W indshield W ash/W ipe
W indshield
D efrost/D em ist
Rear W indow
D efrost/D em ist
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Introduction
8
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Pow er W indow s
Front/Rear
Pow er W indow Lockout
Child Safety D oor
Lock/U nlock
Interior Luggage
Com partm ent Release
Sym bol
Panic A larm E ngine O il
E ngine Coolant
E ngine Coolant
Tem perature
D o N ot O pen W hen H ot Battery
Avoid Sm oking,Flam es,
or Sparks
Battery A cid
E xplosive G as Fan W arning
Pow er Steering Fluid
M aintain Correct Fluid
Level
MAX
MIN
E m ission System E ngine A ir Filter
Passenger Com partm ent
A ir Filter
Jack
Check FuelCap
Low Tire Pressure
W arning
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Introduction
9
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
W arning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that m ay
becom e serious enough to cause expensive repairs.A w arning light m ay
illum inate w hen a problem exists w ith one ofyour vehicles functions.
M any lights w illillum inate w hen you start your vehicle to m ake sure the
bulb w orks.Ifany light rem ains on after starting the vehicle,refer to the
respective system w arning light for additionalinform ation.
Service engine soon: The Servi ce
engi ne soon indicator light
illum inates w hen the ignition is first
turned to the O N position to check
the bulb.Solid illum ination after the engine is started indicates the O n
Board D iagnostics System (O BD -II) has detected a m alfunction.Refer to
On board di agnosti cs (OBD-II) in the Mai ntenance and Speci fi cati ons
chapter.Ifthe light is blinking,engine m isfire is occurring w hich could
dam age your catalytic converter.D rive in a m oderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
im m ediately by your authorized dealer.
U nder engine m isfire conditions,excessive exhaust tem peratures
could dam age the catalytic converter,the fuelsystem ,interior
floor coverings or other vehicle com ponents,possibly causing a fire.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
10
Check fuel cap: Illum inates w hen the fuelcap m ay not be properly
installed.Continued driving w ith this light on m ay cause the Service
engine soon w arning light to com e on.Refer to Fuel fi ller cap in the
Mai ntenance and Speci fi cati ons chapter.
W ithout m essage center
W ith m essage center
Brake systemwarninglight: To
confirm the brake system w arning
light is functional,it w ill
m om entarily illum inate w hen the
ignition is turned to the O N position
w hen the engine is not running,or in a position betw een O N and STA RT,
or by applying the parking brake w hen the ignition is turned to the O N
position.Ifthe brake system w arning light does not illum inate at this
tim e,seek service im m ediately from your authorized dealer.Illum ination
after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid leveland the
brake system should be inspected im m ediately by your authorized dealer.
D riving a vehicle w ith the brake system w arning light on is
dangerous.A significant decrease in braking perform ance m ay
occur.It w illtake you longer to stop the vehicle.H ave the vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer.
Anti-lock brake system:
Illum inates indicating an A BS fault.
Ifthe lam p stays on for m ore than a
few seconds,then an A BS fault is
indicated,have the system serviced
im m ediately by your authorized dealer.N orm albraking is stillfunctional
unless the brake w arning light also is illum inated.
!
BRAKE
ABS
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
11
Airbagreadiness: Ifthis light fails
to illum inate w hen ignition is turned
to O N ,continues to flash or rem ains
on,have the system serviced
im m ediately by your authorized
dealer.A chim e w illalso sound w hen a m alfunction in the supplem ental
restraint system has been detected.
Safety belt: Rem inds you to fasten
your safety belt.A chim e w illalso
sound to rem ind you to fasten your
safety belt.
Chargingsystem: Illum inates w hen
the battery is not charging properly.
Engine oil pressure: Illum inates
w hen the oilpressure falls below the
norm alrange,refer to Engi ne oi l in
the Mai ntenance and
Speci fi cati ons chapter.
Lowfuel: Illum inates w hen the fuellevelin the fueltank is at or near
em pty (refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter).
Overdrive off: Illum inates w hen
the overdrive function ofthe
transm ission has been turned off,
refer to the Dri vi ng chapter.Ifthe
light flashes steadily or does not illum inate,have the transm ission
serviced soon,or dam age m ay occur.
O/ D
OFF
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
12
Lowtire pressure warning:
Illum inates w hen your tire pressure
is low.Ifthe light rem ains O N at
start up or w hile driving,the tire
pressure should be checked.Refer
to Inflati ng Your Ti res in the Ti res, Wheels and Loadi ng chapter.
W hen the ignition is first turned to O N ,the light w illillum inate for 3
seconds to ensure the bulb is w orking.Ifthe light does not turn O N ,
have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.For m ore
inform ation on this system ,refer to Understandi ng Your Ti re Pressure
Moni tori ng System in the Ti res, Wheels and Loadi ng chapter.
Four wheel drive indicator (if equipped): Illum inates w hen ignition
is first turned O N to check bulb.Blinking indicator indicates system has
been disabled.Ifthe light rem ains on have the system serviced.
D isplays w hen four-w heeldrive
system requires service.
Anti-theft system: Flashes w hen
the Securilock Passive A nti-theft
System has been activated.
Speedcontrol (if equipped):
Illum inates w hen the speed control
is activated.Turns offw hen the
speed controlsystem is deactivated.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
13
Door ajar: Illum inates w hen the ignition is in the O N position and any
door is open.
D isplays w hich door,liftgate or
liftgate glass is open.
Turn signal: Illum inates w hen the
left or right turn signalor the
hazard lights are turned on.Ifthe
indicators stay on or flash faster,check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illum inates w hen the
high beam headlam ps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warningchime: Sounds w hen the key is left in the
ignition in the O FF/LO CK or A CCE SSO RY position and the drivers door
is opened.
Headlamps on warningchime: Sounds w hen the headlam ps or parking
lam ps are on,the ignition is off(the key is not in the ignition) and the
drivers door is opened.
Turn signal warningchime: Sounds w hen the turn signallever has
been activated to signala turn and not turned offafter the vehicle is
driven m ore than 2 m iles (3.3 km ).
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
14
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
tem perature.A t norm aloperating
tem perature,the needle w illbe in
the norm alrange (betw een H and
C).If it enters the redsection,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine andlet the engine cool.
N ever rem ove the coolant reservoir cap w hile the engine is
running or hot.
Odometer: Registers the totalm iles
(kilom eters) ofthe vehicle.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
15
Tripodometer: Registers the m iles
(kilom eters) ofindividualjourneys.
To reset,tap on the trip reset
button to toggle the display betw een
the trip and the odom eter.H olding
the reset button for one or tw o
seconds w illreset the trip odom eter to zero.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per m inute.
D riving w ith your tachom eter
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale m ay dam age the engine.
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approxim ately how m uch fuelis left
in the fueltank (w hen the ignition
is in the O N position).The fuel
gauge m ay vary slightly w hen the
vehicle is in m otion or on a grade.
The arrow near the fuelpum p icon
indicates w hich side ofthe vehicle
the fuelfiller door is located.
Refer to Fi lli ng the tank in the Mai ntenance and Speci fi cati ons
chapter for m ore inform ation.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
16
AUDIO SYSTEMS
Premium Satellite Compatible AM/FM Stereo In-Dash Six CD/MP3
Radio (if equipped)
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
17
Audiophile Satellite Compatible AM/FM Stereo In-Dash Six CD/MP3
Radio (if equipped)
1.SEEK: Press and release
SE E K / for previous/next
strong station or track.
2.TEXT: The filenam e (Fi),song
title (So),artist text (A r) or album
text (A L) m ay be view ed w hile
playing an M P3 selection.W hen M P3 selection text is show n on the
m essage display its corresponding text indicator (Fi,So,A r,or A L) is
show n in the elapsed tim e display.Press TE X T to scrollthrough the text
fields.The display w illscrollallofthe text in the current field before
changing to the next field.(TE X T m ust be pressed w ithin 3 seconds of
the previous button press to proceed to the next/last text display.)
TE X T is also available w hen equipped w ith Satellite radio.Your radio
com es equipped w ith Satellite ready capability.The kit to enable Satellite
reception is available through your dealer.D etailed Satellite instructions
are included w ith the dealer installed kit.Dealer i nstalled satelli te ki t
only avai lable i n the conti nental Uni ted States.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
18
3.AUX: This function is not
operational.
4.MUTE: Press to M U TE playing
m edia;press again to return to
playing m edia
5.EJ : Press to eject a CD .Press E J
and a m em ory preset to eject a
specific disc.Press and hold to eject allloaded discs.
6.Bass: Press BA SS;then press
SE L / to decrease/increase
the bass output.
Treble: Press TRE B;then press
the treble output.
7.Select: U se w ith Bass,Treble,
Balance,Fade and other m enu
functions.
8.Balance: Press BA L;then press
SE L / to shift sound to the
left/right speakers.
Fade: Press FA D E ;then press
rear/front speakers.
9.Menu: Press to access the
follow ing features:
RDS (if equipped): Press and hold
M E N U to access RD S on/off.U se
SE L to toggle RD S on/off.Press M E N U again to access Traffic m ode,
Program Type m ode or Show Type m ode.(M E N U m ust be pressed
w ithin 10 seconds to proceed to the next RD S m ode).
The FederalCom m unications Com m ission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio
and Telecom m unications Com m ission (CRTC) recom m end that FM radio
broadcasters use RD S technology to transm it inform ation.FM radio
stations are independently operated and individually elect to use RD S
technology to transm it station ID and program type as desired.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
19
Traffic: A llow s you to hear traffic broadcasts.W ith the feature O N ,press
SE E K or SCA N to find a station broadcasting a traffic report (ifit is
broadcasting RD S data).Traffi c i nformati on i s not avai lable i n most
U.S. markets.
FIND Programtype: A llow s you to search RD S-equipped stations for a
certain category ofm usic form at:Classic,Country,Info,Jazz,O ldies,
R& B,Religious,Rock,Soft,Top 40.
Press and hold M E N U untilRD S X X is show n in the display.Press M E N U
untilFIN D appears in the display.U se SE L to scrollthrough m usic types.
Press SE E K or SCA N to search for a station playing the requested m usic
category.
ShowTYPE: D isplays the stations callletters or m usic form at.
Press and hold M E N U untilRD S X X is show n in the display Press M E N U
untilSH O W appears in the display.U se SE L to select N A M E or TYPE .
Occupancy mode: Press M E N U untiloccupancy m ode appears in the
display.Press SE L to select A LL SE ATS,D RIVE R SE AT or RE A R SE ATS
occupancy m ode.
Compression: Brings soft and loud CD passages together for a m ore
consistent listening levelw hen in CD m ode.Press M E N U until
com pression status is displayed.Press the SE L controlto enable the
com pression feature w hen CO M PRE SS O FF is displayed.Press the SE L
controlagain to disable the feature w hen CO M PRE SS O N is displayed.
Autoset: A llow s you to set the strongest localradio stations w ithout
losing your originalm anually set preset stations for A M /FM 1/FM 2 .Press
M E N U untilA U TO SE T appears in the display.Press SE L to toggle
O N /O FF.W hen the six strongest stations are filled,the station stored in
preset 1 w illbegin playing.Ifthere are less than six strong stations,the
system w illstore the last one in the rem aining presets.
Speedsensitive volume: Radio volum e changes autom atically and
slightly w ith vehicle speed to com pensate for road and w ind noise.
Recom m ended levelis 13.Level0 turns the feature offand level7 is
the m axim um setting.
Press M E N U untilSPE E D VO L X appears in the display.Then press SE L
to increase ( ) or decrease ( ) the volum e setting.The levelw ill
appear in the display.
Settingthe clock: Press M E N U untilSE LE CT H O U R or SE LE CT M IN S
is displayed.U se SE L to m anually increase ( ) or decrease ( ) the
hours/m inutes.Press M E N U again to disengage clock m ode.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
20
Folder/Track Mode: In M P3 m ode,press M E N U untilM O D E appears in
the display.U se SE L to toggle betw een FO LD E R (only tracks w ithin
selected folder are accessible) or TRA CK (alltracks on disc are
accessible) M O D E .
10.REPEAT: Repeats current
CD /M P3 track w hen active (O N ).
Press to show repeat status.Press
again to toggle status.
11.SHUFFLE: Plays CD /M P3
tracks in random order w hen active
(O N ).Press to show shuffle status.
Press again to toggle status.
12.FOLDER :Press to access
the next M P3 directory.
the previous M P3 directory.
14.FF(Fast forw ard):In CD m ode,
press untildesired selection is
reached.
15.REW(Rew ind):In CD m ode,
press untildesired selection is
reached.
16.SAT (if equipped): Your radio
com es equipped w ith Satellite Ready
capability.The kit to enable the
Satellite reception is available through your dealer.D etailed satellite
instructions are included w ith the dealer installed kit.Dealer i nstalled
satelli te ki t only avai lable i n the conti nental Uni ted States.
17.BAND: Press to toggle betw een
A M /FM 1/FM 2 frequency band.
18.Memory presets: To set a
station:Select frequency band,tune
to a station,press and hold a preset
button untilsound returns.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
21
19.Power/volume: Press to turn
O N /O FF;turn to increase or
decrease volum e levels.
20.Load: Press to load a CD .Press
LO A D and a m em ory preset to load
to a specific disc slot.Press and
hold to load up to six discs.
21.CD: Press to enter CD m ode.
CD units are designedto play commercially pressed4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable andre-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when usedin FordCD players.
Irregular shapedCDs, CDs with a scratch protection film
attached, andCDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should
not be insertedinto the CD player. The label may peel andcause
the CD to become jammed. It is recommendedthat homemade
CDs be identifiedwith permanent felt tipmarker rather than
adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact
your authorizeddealer for further information.
22.Scan: Press SCA N to hear a
briefsam pling ofradio stations or
CD /M P3 tracks.Press again to stop.
23.Disc/Tune: Press or to
m anually tune dow n/up the radio
frequency band,or to listen to the
previous/next CD .
CAT: CAT is only available w hen equipped w ith Satellite Radio.Your
radio com es equipped w ith Satellite ready capability.The kit to enable
Satellite reception is available through your dealer.D etailed Satellite
For inform ation regarding SIRIU S Satellite Radio,please calltoll-free
888-539-SIRIU S (888-539-7474) or visit the SIRIU S w ebsite at
w w w.siriusradio.com
24.CD slot: Insert a CD ,labelside up.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
22
AM/FM stereo in-dash six CD modular audio (if equipped)
1.CD: To begin CD play,press
LO A D .W hen the system is ready to
accept a disc,IN w illappear on the
radio display.You m ay then insert a CD .The system w illload the CD and
begin play after a short pause.The disc num ber and track num ber w ill
illum inate in the display.
Ifa CD is already loaded into the system ,press CD to enter CD m ode
and select the desired CD to play.
your dealer for further information.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
23
2.AUTO SCAN:A U TO :A uto
m em ory tuning allow s you to set
strong radio stations w ithout loosing
your originalm anually set preset stations.
Press the A M or FM 1/2 controlto select a frequency.Press and
m om entarily hold the A U TO -S control.The system w illbeep.W hen the
first six strong stations are filled,the strongest station w illstart playing.
Press A U TO -S to select from the stored stations.O ne stored station w ill
be selected and played each tim e the controlis pressed.The frequency
and the channelnum ber w illbe displayed.
SCAN: Scan w orks in radio and CD m ode.Press SCA N to hear a brief
sam pling ofalllistenable stations on the frequency band or the first ten
seconds ofeach track.Press SCA N again to stop.
3.Eject: Press to eject the CD
currently playing.Press CD plus the
preset num ber to eject a specific
CD .Press and hold to eject allCD s.
4.TUNE MENU: Press to enter
M enu m ode.Press repeatedly to
scrollthrough the follow ing options:
Bass: Press the controluntilBA SS
appears in the display.Turn the
controlto increase/decrease the
levelofbass.
Mid-range (if equipped): Press the controluntilM ID appears in the
display.Turn the controlto increase/decrease the levelofm id-range.
Treble: Press the controluntilTRE B appears in the display.Turn the
controlto increase/decrease the leveloftreble.
Fade: Press the controluntilFA D E appears in the display.Turn the
controlto adjust the sound betw een the rear and front speakers.
Balance: Press the controluntilBA L appears in the display.Turn the
controlto adjust the sound betw een the left and right speakers.
5.CLK (Clock): Press to alternate
betw een clock display and audio
display.
Note: Ifthe audio operation is selected w hile the clock m ode is on,the
selected audio m ode w illbe displayed for ten seconds,then the display
w illrevert to the clock m ode.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
24
Settingthe clock: Press and hold CLK for approxim ately tw o seconds
untila beep is heard.The clocks current tim e w illflash.Press SCA N on the
m inute set control(M ) to set the m inutes.Press A U TO -S on the hour set
control(H ) to adjust the hours.Press CLK again to disengage clock m ode.
6.FF (Fast forward): In CD
m ode,press and hold to advance
through a track at high speed.
7.REW(Rewind): In CD m ode,
press and hold to reverse through a
track at high speed.
8.SHUF (Shuffle): Press to play
alltracks on the current CD in
random order.
9.RPT (Repeat): Press to repeat
the current CD track.The track w ill
repeat continuously untilRPT is
pressed again.
10.DISC :Press to skip forw ard
to the beginning ofthe next CD .
11.DISC :Press to skip back to
the beginning ofthe previous CD .
station:Select frequency band A M /FM ;tune to a station,press and hold
a preset button untilsound returns.
13.Volume/ON/OFF: Press to turn
O N /O FF.Turn to increase/decrease
the levelofvolum e.
14.LOAD: The load feature allow s
you to load up to six single CD s into
the audio system .Press LO A D .In
w illappear in the display w hen the system is ready.Insert the CD .
Autoload: To load up to six CD s into the system :Press and hold LO A D
untila beep is heard.W hen Inis displayed,insert the desired CD .
W hen Inis displayed again,insert the next CD .Continue untilallsix
are loaded (ifdesired).
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
25
15.SEEK TRACK: In radio
m ode,press to find the next ( )
or previous ( ) listenable station
on the frequency band.
In CD m ode,press to listen the next ( ) or previous ( ) track.
16.CD door: Insert CD s labelside
up.
17.FM1/2: Press to enter FM
m ode.Press to toggle betw een FM 1
and FM 2.
18.AM: Press to enter A M m ode.
Satellite Compatible AM/FM Stereo In-Dash Single CD/MP3 Radio
(if equipped)
1.SEEK: Press and release
strong station or track.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
26
2.TEXT: The filenam e (Fi),song
title (So),artist text (A r) or album
text (A L) m ay be view ed w hile
playing an M P3 selection.W hen M P3 selection text is show n on the
m essage display,its corresponding text indicator (Fi,So,A r,or A L) is
show n in the elapsed tim e display.Press TE X T to scrollthrough the text
fields.The display w illscrollthrough allofthe text in the current field
before changing to the next field.(TE X T m ust be pressed w ithin 3
seconds ofthe previous press to proceed to the next/last text display.
The last text field show n on the display w illbecom e the new display
m essage default.
3.AUX: This controlis not
operational.
4.MUTE: Press to M U TE playing
m edia;press again to return to
playing m edia
5.EJ : Press to eject a CD .
the bass output.
the treble output.
7.Select: U se w ith Bass,Treble,
Balance,Fade and other m enu
selections.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
27
9.Menu: Press M E N U and SE L to
access A U TO SE T,Speed sensitive
volum e and Setting the clock.
Autoset: Press M E N U untilA U TO SE T appears in the display.Press SE L
to toggle O N /O FF.A llow s you to set the strongest localradio stations
w ithout losing your originalm anually set preset stations for
A M /FM 1/FM 2.W hen the six strongest stations are filled,the station
stored in preset 1 w illbegin playing.Ifthere are less than six strong
stations,the system w illstore the last one in the rem aining presets.
Speedsensitive volume: Press M E N U untilSPE E D VO L X appears in
the display.Then press SE L to increase ( ) or decrease ( ) the
volum e setting.The levelw illappear in the display.
Radio volum e changes autom atically and slightly w ith vehicle speed to
com pensate for road and w ind noise.Recom m ended levelis 13.Level0
turns the feature offand level7 is the m axim um setting.
Settingthe clock: Press M E N U untilSE LE CT H O U R or SE LE CT
M IN U TE is displayed.U se SE L to m anually increase ( ) or decrease
( ) the hours/m inutes.Press M E N U again to disengage clock m ode.
Folder/Track mode: In M P3 m ode,press M E N U untilM O D E appears in
selected folder are accessible) or TRA CK (alltracks on disc are
10.REPEAT: Press to repeat the
current CD /M P3 track.
11.SHUFFLE: Press to play the
CD /M P3 tracks on the current disc
in random order.
the next M P3 directory.
the previous M P3 directory.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
28
14.FF(Fast forw ard):In CD /M P3
m ode,press untildesired selection
is reached.
15.REW(Rew ind):In CD /M P3
m ode,press untildesired selection
is reached.
16.SAT (if equipped): Your radio
com es equipped w ith Satellite Ready
capability.The kit to enable the
Satellite reception is available through your dealer.D etailed satellite
17.BAND: Press to toggle betw een
A M /FM 1/FM 2 frequency band.
station:Select frequency band;tune
to a station,press and hold a preset
O N /O FF;turn to increase or
decrease volum e levels.
20.CD: Press to enter CD m ode.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
29
21.COMP(Com pression):Brings
soft and loud CD passages together
for a m ore consistent listening level
w hen in CD m ode.Press CO M P to turn the feature O N /O FF.
22.Scan: Press SCA N to hear a
briefsam pling ofradio stations or
CD /M P3 tracks.Press again to stop.
23.CAT/Tune: Press or to
m anually tune dow n/up the radio
frequency band.
For inform ation regarding SIRIU S Satellite Radio,please calltoll-free
888-539-SIRIU S (888-539-7474) or visit the SIRIU S w ebsite at
w w w.siriusradio.com
24.CD slot: Insert a CD w ith the labelside up.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
30
Premium Satellite Compatible AM/FM Stereo/Cassette/Single
CD/MP3 (if equipped)
1.CD slot: Insert a CD w ith the
labelside up.
CD units are designedto play
commercially pressed4.75 in
2.CD Eject: Press to eject a CD .
The radio w illresum e playing.
REW FF
SCAN BASS TREB
TEXT
SEL
BAL
TAPE
1-2
EJ CD
FADE
AUX
MENU
SHUFFLE
EJ
MUTE
SEEK
TUNE
1 2 3 4 5 6
DOLBY B NR
DISC
REPEAT FOLDER FOLDER
BAND
CAT
VOL-PUSH ON
17
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
14 16 15 13 12 10 8 9 11
23
18
19
20
21
22
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
31
3.Mute: Press to M U TE playing
m edia;press again to return to the
playing m edia.
4.Tape Eject: Press to eject the
cassette.The radio w illresum e
playing.
5.Tape 12/CD: Press to begin
tape play.Ifa cassette is already
playing,press to change playing
sides.
CD: Ifa CD is loaded in the radio,
pressing CD w illcause the CD to
begin playing.
6.AUX: Press to toggle betw een the
current playing m edia and D VD (if
equipped).
7.MENU: Press to access the
follow ing functions:
Clock: Press M E N U untilSE LE CT H O U R or SE LE CT M IN U TE is
displayed.Press SE L to decrease/increase hours or m inutes.
Compression: In CD m ode,press to bring soft and loud passages
together for a m ore consistent listening level.Press M E N U until
CO M PRE SS is displayed.U se SE L to toggle on/off.
Speedsensitive volume: Radio volum e changes autom atically and
slightly w ith vehicle speed to com pensate for road and w ind noise.
Recom m ended levelis 13.Level0 turns the feature offand level7 is
the m axim um setting.Press M E N U untilSPE E D VO L X appears in the
display.Then press SE L to increase/decrease the volum e setting.The
levelw illappear in the display.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
32
Dolby: In tape m ode,press M E N U untilD O LBY B X X appears in the
display.Press SE L to toggle O N /O FF.
The D olby noise reduction system is m anufactured under license from
D olby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.D olby and the double-D
sym bolare registered tradem arks ofD olby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
Folder/Track Mode: In M P3 m ode,press M E N U untilM O D E appears in
selected folder are accessible) or TRA CK (alltracks on disk are
Autoset: Press M E N U untilA U TO SE T appears in the display.Press SE L
to toggle on/off.A llow s you to set the strongest localstations w ithout
losing your originalm em ory preset stations for A M /FM 1/FM 2.W hen the
six strongest stations are filled,the station stored in preset 1 w illbegin
playing.Ifthere are less than six strong stations,the system w illstore
the last one in the rem aining presets.
8.REPEAT: Press to repeat the
current CD /M P3 track.Press to
show repeat status.Press again to
toggle status.
10.SHUFFLE: In CD /M P3 m ode,
press to play tracks in random
order.Press to show shuffle status.
Press again to toggle status.
11.TEXT/SEL: The filenam e,song
title,artist text or album text m ay
be view ed w hile playing an M P3
selection.Press TE X T to scrollthrough the text fields.The display w ill
scrollthrough allofthe text in the current field before changing to the
next field.(TE X T m ust be pressed w ithin three seconds ofthe previous
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
33
button press to proceed to the next/last text display.) The last text field
show n on the display w illbecom e the new display m essage default.
Select: U se w ith Bass,Treble,Balance,Fade and other m enu selections.
the next M P3 directory folder.
the previous M P3 directory folder.
the bass output.
the treble output.
15.Fast Forward(FF): In CD
m ode,press and hold to fast
forw ard.In tape m ode,press to
activate fast forw ard.Press FF again
to return to play.
16.Rewind(REW): In CD m ode,
press and hold to reverse CD .In
tape m ode,press to rew ind.Press
RE W again to return to play.
17.Memory preset buttons: To set a station:Press BA N D to select the
frequency band (A M /FM 1/FM 2) tune to a station,press and hold a preset
FF
2
REW
1
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
34
18.Scan: Press to hear a brief
sam pling ofalllistenable stations,
tape selections or CD tracks.Press
again to stop.
19.Tune/CAT: TU N E :W orks in
radio m ode only.Press
TU N E / to change frequency
dow n/up.
20.Seek: Press and release
strong station,tape selection or CD
track.
21.BAND: Press to toggle through
A M /FM 1/FM 2 frequency bands.
22.Cassette door: Insert the cassette w ith the opening to the right.
O N /O FF;turn to increase/decrease
volum e.
Accessory delay
W ith accessory delay,the w indow sw itches,m oon roof(ifequipped) and
audio system m ay be used for up to ten m inutes after the ignition sw itch
is turned offor untileither front door is opened.
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies: A M and FM frequencies are established by the
FederalCom m unications Com m ission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecom m unications Com m ission (CRTC).Those frequencies are:
A M - 530,5401700,1710 kH z
FM - 87.7,87.9107.7,107.9 M H z
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
35
Radio reception factors: There are three factors that can affect radio
reception:
D istance/strength:The further you travelfrom a station,the w eaker
the signaland the w eaker the reception.
Terrain:H ills,m ountains,tallbuildings,pow er lines,electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorm s can interfere w ith your reception.
Station overload:W hen you pass a broadcast tow er,a stronger signal
m ay overtake a w eaker one and play w hile the w eak station frequency
is displayed.
Cassette/player care:
D o:
U se only cassettes that are 90 m inutes long or less.
Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencilinto the hole
and turning the hub.
Rem ove loose labels before inserting tapes.
A llow tapes w hich have been subjected to extrem e heat,hum idity or
cold to reach a m oderate tem perature before playing.
Clean the cassette player head w ith a cassette cleaning cartridge after
1012 hours ofplay to m aintain good sound/operation.
D ont:
E xpose tapes to direct sunlight,extrem e hum idity,heat or cold.
Leave tapes in the cassette player for a long tim e w hen not being
played.
CD/CD player care:
D o:
H andle discs by their edges only.N ever touch the playing surface.
Inspect discs before playing.Clean only w ith an approved CD cleaner
and w ipe from the center out.
D ont:
E xpose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
oftim e.
Clean using a circular m otion.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
36
Dirty, warpedor damagedCDs, irregular shapedCDs, CDs with a
scratch protection filmattached, andCDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels shouldnot be insertedinto the CD player. The
label may peel andcause the CD to become jammed. It is
recommendedthat homemade CDs be identifiedwith permanent
felt tipmarker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your authorizeddealer for further
information.
Audio systemwarranty andservice: Refer to the Warranty Gui de
for audio system w arranty inform ation.Ifservice is necessary,see your
dealer or qualified technician.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
37
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1.Fan speedadjustment: Controls
the volum e ofair circulated in the
vehicle.
2.Air flowselections: Controls
the direction ofthe airflow in the
vehicle.See the follow ing for a brief
description on each control.
: D istributes outside air through the instrum ent panelvents.
: D istributes outside air through the instrum ent panelvents and the
floor vents.
O (OFF): O utside air is shut out and the fan w illnot operate.
: D istributes outside air through the floor vents.
: D istributes outside air through the w indshield defroster vents and
floor vents.
: D istributes outside air through the w indshield defroster vents.
3.Temperature selection: Controls the tem perature ofthe airflow in
the vehicle.
Operating tips
To reduce fog build up on the w indshield during hum id w eather,place
the air flow selector in the position.
To reduce hum idity build up inside the vehicle during cold or w arm
w eather,do not drive w ith the air flow selector in the O FF position.
D o not put objects under the front seats that w illinterfere w ith the air
flow to the rear seats.
Rem ove any snow,ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the w indshield.
To aid in side w indow defogging/dem isting in cold w eather:
1.Select .
2.A djust the tem perature controlto m aintain com fort.
3.Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
4.D irect the outer instrum ent panelvents tow ard the side w indow s.
To increase airflow to the outer instrum ent panelvents,close the vents
located in the m iddle ofthe instrum ent panel.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
38
D o not place objects on top ofthe instrum ent panelas these
objects m ay becom e projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1.Fan speedadjustment: Controls
the volum e ofair circulated in the
vehicle.
2.Air flowselections: Controls
the direction ofthe airflow in the
vehicle.See the follow ing for a brief
description on each control.
MAX A/C: U ses recirculated air to coolthe vehicle.A ir flow s from the
instrum ent panelvents only.
A/C: U ses outside air to coolthe vehicle.A ir flow s from the instrum ent
panelvents only.
: D istributes outside air through the instrum ent panelvents.
O (OFF): O utside air is shut out and the fan w illnot operate.
: D istributes outside air through the instrum ent panelvents and the
floor vents.
: D istributes outside air through the floor vents.
: D istributes outside air through the w indshield defroster vents and
floor vents.The air conditioner w illautom atically turn on to dehum idify
the air.
: D istributes outside air through the w indshield defroster vents.The
air conditioner w illautom atically turn on to dehum idify the air.
3.Temperature selection: Controls the tem perature ofthe airflow in
the vehicle.
Operating tips
To reduce fog build up on the w indshield during hum id w eather,place
the air flow selector in the position.
To reduce hum idity build up inside the vehicle:do not drive w ith the
air flow selector in the O (O FF) or M A X A /C position.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
39
U nder norm alw eather conditions,do not leave the air flow selector in
M A X A /C or O (O FF) w hen the vehicle is parked.This allow s the
vehicle to breatheusing the outside air inlet vents.
D o not put objects under the front seats that w illinterfere w ith the
airflow to the back seats.
Rem ove any snow,ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the w indshield.
To aid in side w indow defogging/dem isting in cold w eather:
1.Select A /C.
2.A djust the tem perature controlto m aintain com fort.
3.Set the fan speed to 4.
4.D irect the outer instrum ent panelvents tow ards the side w indow s.
To increase airflow to the outer instrum ent panelvents,close the vents
located in the m iddle ofthe instrum ent panel.
D o not place objects on top ofthe instrum ent panelas these
objects m ay becom e projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
The rear defroster controlis located
on the instrum ent panel.Press to
clear the rear w indow ofthin ice
and fog.The sm allLE D w ill
illum inate w hen activated.
E nsure that the ignition is in the 3 (RU N ) position in order to operate
the rear w indow defroster.
The defroster turns offautom atically after 15 m inutes or w hen the
ignition is turned to the 1 (LO CK ) position.To m anually turn offthe
defroster before 15 m inutes have passed,push the controla second tim e.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
40
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Rotate the headlam p controlto the
first position to turn on the
parking lam ps.Rotate to the second
position to also turn on the
headlam ps.
Headlampbattery saver
The battery saver w illshut offthe exterior lam ps 10 m inutes after the
ignition sw itch has been turned offifthe headlam p controlis in
the position.The system w illnot shut offthe parking lam ps ifthe
headlam p controlis in the position.
Autolamp control (if equipped)
The autolam p system sets the
headlam ps to turn on and off
autom atically.The autolam p control,
located on the headlam p sw itch,
w ill:
turn on the lam ps autom atically
at night
turn offthe lam ps autom atically
during the daylight
keep the lam ps on for up to three m inutes after the key is turned to
O FF.
See Autolamp delay system (i f equi pped) to set the auto headlam p off
delay tim e.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Lights
41
Autolamp delay system (if equipped)
Ifyour vehicle has an autolam p delay feature,you can set the delay tim e
to keep the headlights on for up to three m inutes after the key is turned
O FF.The delay tim e is set to 20 seconds at the factory,but the delay
tim e m ay be changed by follow ing the steps below (Steps 1 through 6
m ust be done w ithin 10 seconds):
1.Turn the key to the 1 (LO CK )
position.
2.Rotate the headlam p controlto
the autolam p position.
3.Rotate the headlam p controlto
the O FF position.
4.Turn the key to the 3 (RU N )
position.
5.Turn the key back to the 1
(LO CK ) position.
6.Turn the headlam p controlto the autolam p position (the headlights
should turn on).
7.Turn the headlam p controlto the O FF position w hen the desired
delay tim e (up to 3 m inutes) has been reached.
High beams
Push the lever tow ard the
instrum ent panelto activate.Pull
the lever tow ards you to deactivate.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Lights
42
Flash to pass
Pulltow ard you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the low beam headlam ps on w ith a reduced output.
To activate:
the ignition m ust be in the 3 (RU N ) position.
the headlam p controlm ust be in the O FF,parking lam ps or autolam p
position.
the parking brake m ust be released.
A lw ays rem em ber to turn on your headlam ps at dusk or during
inclem ent w eather.The D aytim e Running Lam p (D RL) system
does not activate the taillam ps and generally m ay not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions.Failure to activate your
headlam ps under these conditions m ay result in a collision.
Smart park lamps (if equipped)
Ifyour vehicle is equipped w ith the D RL and autolam p features,your
park lam ps w illturn on autom atically w hen lighting conditions are dark
and D RLs are activated (the headlam p controlis in the O FF position).
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Lights
43
Foglamp control (if equipped)
Press the foglam p control,located
on the instrum ent panel,to activate
the foglam ps.The foglam p indicator
w illillum inate w hen the foglam ps
are on.Press the foglam p controlto
deactivate the foglam ps.
The foglam ps w illonly operate w ith
the parking lam ps or headlam ps on.
W hen the highbeam s are activated,the foglam ps w illnot operate.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
U se to adjust the brightness ofthe instrum ent panel.
Push and hold top ofcontrolto
brighten.
Push and hold bottom ofcontrol
to dim .
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlam ps on your vehicle are properly aim ed at the assem bly plant.
Ifyour vehicle has been in an accident the alignm ent ofyour headlam ps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical aim adjustment
1.Park the vehicle directly in front ofa w allor screen on a levelsurface,
approxim ately 25 feet (7.6 m eters) aw ay.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Lights
44
(1) 8 feet (2.4 m eters)
(2) Center height oflam p to
ground
(3) 25 feet (7.6 m eters)
(4) H orizontalreference line
2.M easure the height from the
center ofyour headlam p to the
ground and m ark an 8 foot (2.4
m eter) horizontalreference line on
the verticalw allor screen at this
height (a piece ofm asking tape w orks w ell).The center ofthe lam p is
m arked by a 3.0 m m circle on the headlam p lens.
3.Turn on the low beam headlam ps to illum inate the w allor screen and
open the hood.Cover the left-hand headlam p w ith an opaque cloth.
4.O n the w allor screen you w ill
observe a light pattern w ith a
distinct horizontaledge ofhigh
intensity light tow ards the right.If
this edge is not at the horizontal
reference line,the beam w illneed to
be adjusted.
5.Locate the verticaladjuster on
the headlam p,then use a 4 m m
socket to turn the adjuster either
counterclockw ise (to adjust dow n)
or clockw ise (to adjust up) aligning
the upper edge ofthe light pattern
to the horizontalline.
6.M ove the opaque cloth to cover
the right-hand headlam p and repeat
Steps 4 and 5 for the left-hand
headlam p.
7.H O RIZO N TA L A IM IS N O T RE Q U IRE D FO R TH IS VE H ICLE A N D IS
N O N -A D JU STA BLE .
8.Close the hood and turn offthe lam ps.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Lights
45
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
Push dow n to activate the left
turn signal.
Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Dome lamps and map lamps
The front dom e lam p is located overhead betw een the driver and
passenger seats.
The dom e lam p controlhas three
positions:
O FF:In this position,the lam p
w illnot illum inate.
D O O R:In this position,the dom e
lam p w illillum inate only w hen a
door is opened and w illrem ain
illum inated for 25 seconds after the door is shut.
O N :In this position,the lam p w illrem ain illum inated.
The m ap lam p controls (w ithout
m oon roof) are located on the dom e
lam p.Press the button on either
side ofeach m ap lam p to illum inate
the lam ps.Push the button again to
turn offthe lam ps.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Lights
46
For m odels equipped w ith a m oon
roof,the m ap lam ps are located on
the m oon roofcontrolpanel.Press
the button on either side ofeach
m ap lam p to illum inate the lam ps.
Push the button again to turn off
the lam ps.
The m ap lam ps w illillum inate
w henever a door is opened.A fter
the door is shut,the lam ps w illrem ain illum inated for 25 seconds.
Cargo and dome lamp
Rear cargo lam p equipped w ith an
O N /O FF/D O O R controlw illlight
w hen:
the doors are closed and the
controlis in the O N position.
the controlis in the D O O R
position and any door is open.
W hen the controlis in the O FF position,it w illnot illum inate w hen you
open the doors.
Interior lighting battery saver
The dom e and/or cargo lam ps w illautom atically extinguish after 10
m inutes w hen the ignition key is O FF,a door has been left open and the
dom e and/or cargo lam p controls are in the D O O R position.O therw ise,
interior lam ps including the dom e and/or cargo lam ps w illautom atically
extinguish after 30 m inutes w hen the ignition key is O FF.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp Condensation
The headlam ps are vented to equalize pressure.W hen m oist air enters
the headlam p(s) through the vents,there is a possibility that
condensation can occur.This condensation is norm aland w illclear
w ithin 45 m inutes ofheadlam p operation.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation ofallthe bulbs frequently.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Lights
47
Using the right bulbs
Replacem ent bulbs are specified in the chart below.H eadlam p bulbs
m ust be m arked w ith an authorized D .O .T.for N orth A m erica and an
E for E urope to ensure lam p perform ance,light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility.The correct bulbs w illnot dam age the lam p assem bly
or void the lam p assem bly w arranty and w illprovide quality bulb burn
tim e.
Function Number of bulbs Trade number
Park/turn lam ps
(front)
2
3157 A K (am ber)
H eadlam ps (low
beam s)
2
H 11
H eadlam ps (high
beam s)
2
H 7
Rear
stop/tail/sidem arker
2
3157K or 4157K
Rear turn lam ps 2 3156
Backup lam p 2 3156
Foglam p (front) 2 H 10
Center H igh-m ount
stop lam p
5
W 5W
Rear license plate
lam p
2
W 5W
A llreplacem ent bulbs are clear in color except w here noted.
To replace allinstrum ent panellights - see your authorized dealer
Replacing the interior bulbs
Check the operation ofallbulbs frequently.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
1.M ake sure that the headlam p controlis in the O FF position and open
the hood.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Lights
48
2.Press dow n on the w ire retainer
to release it and access the back of
the headlam p assem bly.
Lowbeam bulb replacement
3.Locate the outboard m ost bulb,
turn it a
1
4 turn to the inside ofthe
vehicle and pullthe bulb socket
straight out to rem ove the bulb.
Hi ghbeam bulb replacement
4.Locate the bulb that is the m ost
center in the vehicle,rotate the
socket counterclockw ise and pull
the bulb socket straight out to
rem ove the bulb.
5.Pullthe bulb straight out ofthe
socket and push in the new bulb.
6.To com plete installation,follow
the rem ovalprocedure in reverse
order.
Note: The bulbs m etalbase gets very hot during headlam p operation.
Be sure the bulb base is coolbefore handling.
Note: Ifthe bulb is accidentally touched,it should be cleaned w ith
rubbing alcoholbefore being used.
To com plete installation,follow the rem ovalprocedure in reverse order.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Lights
49
Replacing brake/tail/turn/backup lamp bulbs
The brake/tail/turn/backup lam p bulbs are located in the taillam p
assem bly,one just below the other.Follow the sam e steps to replace
either bulb:
1.M ake sure the headlam p sw itch is
in the O FF position and then open
the liftgate to expose the lam p
assem blies.
2.Rem ove the tw o screw s from the
lam p assem bly.
3.Carefully rem ove the lam p
assem bly by pulling it rearw ard to
disengage snap features on the
outw ard side ofthe lam p.
4.Tw ist the bulb socket
counterclockw ise and rem ove from
lam p assem bly.
6.To com plete installation,follow
the rem ovalprocedure in reverse
order.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1.M ake sure the headlam p sw itch is
in the O FF position and then pry
the license plate lam p assem bly
(located above the license plate)
from the liftgate.
2.Rem ove bulb socket from lam p
assem bly by turning
counterclockw ise.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Lights
50
3.Pullthe bulb out from the socket and push in the new bulb.
4.Installthe bulb socket in lam p assem bly turning it clockw ise.
5.To install,press the lam p assem bly into liftgate.
Replacing high-mount brake lamp bulbs
To rem ove the lam p assem bly:
1.Rem ove the tw o screw s and m ove
the lam p assem bly aw ay from the
liftgate.
2.Rem ove the bulb holder from the
lam p assem bly by depressing the
snaps.
To com plete installation,follow the
rem ovalprocedure in reverse order.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs
For bulb replacem ent,see your authorized dealer.
Replacing foglamp bulbs
For bulb replacem ent,see your authorized dealer.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Lights
51
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshieldwiper: For interm ittent
operation,m ove controldow n one
position.
A djust the rotary controlto the
desired speed setting.
For norm alor low speed w iper
operation,m ove controldow n tw o
positions from O FF.
For high speed w iper operation,
m ove controldow n three positions
from O FF.
Mist function: To activate m ist,
push controlup from the O FF
position and release to get one w ipe.
Windshieldwasher: To activate
the w indshield w asher,pullcontrol
tow ard you.Release controlto stop
w asher fluid spray.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
52
Rear window wiper/washer controls
For interm ittent operation ofrear
w iper,rotate end ofcontrolupw ard
to the position.
For norm alspeed rear w iper
operation,rotate controlupw ard to
O N .
To activate the rear w asher,rotate
the controlto the position and
release.
TILT STEERING WHEEL
To adjust the steering w heel:
1.Pulldow n the steering colum n tilt
lever.
2.M ove the steering w heelup or
dow n untilyou find the desired
location.
3.Push the steering colum n tilt
lever up.This w illlock the steering
w heelin position.
N ever adjust the steering w heelw hen the vehicle is m oving.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
53
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the m irror cover to turn on the
visor m irror lam ps.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance ofyour vehicles overhead console w illvary according to
your option package.
Storage compartment (if equipped)
Press the release on the door to
open the storage com partm ent.
The storage com partm ent m ay be
used to secure sunglasses or a
sim ilar object.
CENTER CONSOLE
Your vehicle is equipped w ith a variety ofconsole features.These
include:
1.Pow er point
2.Cupholders
3.U tility com partm ent
4.A sh cup (ifequipped)
U se only soft cups in the
cupholders.H ard objects
can injure you in a collision.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
54
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designedfor accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet andblowthe fuse. Do not hangany type of accessory or
accessory bracket fromthe plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not coveredby your warranty.
The auxiliary pow er point is located
in the floor console.Cigarette lighter
(ifequipped) is located in the
instrum ent panel.
D o not use the pow er point for
operating the cigarette lighter
elem ent (ifequipped).
To prevent the fuse from being
blow n,do not use the pow er
point(s) over the vehicle capacity of
12 VD C/180W .
To prevent the battery from being discharged,do not use the pow er
point longer than necessary w hen the engine is not running.
A lw ays keep the pow er point caps closed w hen not being used.
Cigar/Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
D o not plug optionalelectricalaccessories into the cigarette lighter
socket.
D o not hold the lighter in w ith your hand w hile it is heating,this w ill
dam age the lighter elem ent and socket.The lighter w illbe released from
its heating position w hen it is ready to be used.
Im proper use ofthe lighter can cause dam age not covered by your
w arranty.
POWER WINDOWS
D o not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play w ith the pow er w indow s.They m ay seriously injure
them selves.
W hen closing the pow er w indow s,you should verify they are free
ofobstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in
the proxim ity ofthe w indow openings.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
55
Press and hold the bottom part of
the rocker sw itch to open the
w indow.Press and hold the top part
ofthe rocker sw itch to close the
w indow.
Note: The w indow sw itches w illnot
illum inate w hen the w indow lock
controlis in the LO CK E D position.
Rear WindowBuffeting: W hen one or both ofthe rear w indow s are
open,the vehicle m ay dem onstrate a w ind throb or buffeting noise;this
noise can be elim inated by low ering a front w indow approxim ately tw o to
three inches.
One touch down
A llow s the drivers w indow to open
fully w ithout holding the control
dow n.Press com pletely dow n on
A U TO and release quickly.Press the
top part ofthe sw itch to stop.
Window lock (if equipped)
The w indow lock feature disables all
the pow er w indow s except the
drivers.
To lock out allthe w indow controls
except for the drivers w indow press
the right side ofthe control.
Note: The passenger w indow sw itches w illnot illum inate w hen the
w indow controlis in the LO CK E D position.
Press the left side to restore the w indow controls.
Accessory delay
W ith accessory delay,the w indow sw itches,m oon roof(ifequipped) and
audio system m ay be used for up to ten m inutes after the ignition sw itch
is turned to the O FF position or untileither front door is opened.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
56
AUTOMATIC DIMMING REAR VIEW MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle m ay be equipped w ith
an inside rear view m irror w ith an
auto-dim m ing function.The
electrochrom ic day/night m irror w ill
change from the norm al(high
reflective) state to the non-glare
(darkened) state w hen bright lights
(glare) reach the m irror.W hen the m irror detects bright light from
behind the vehicle,it w illautom atically adjust (darken) to m inim ize
glare.
The m irror w illautom atically return to the norm alstate w henever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view w hen
backing up.
D o not block the sensor on the backside ofthe inside rear view m irror
since this m ay im pair proper m irror perform ance.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors
To adjust your m irrors:
1.Rotate the control,located on the
instrum ent panelleft ofthe steering
w heel,clockw ise to adjust the right
m irror and rotate the control
counterclockw ise to adjust the left
m irror.
2.M ove the controlin the direction
you w ish to tilt the m irror.
3.Return to the center position to lock m irrors in place.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
57
Fold-away mirrors
Carefully pullthe outside m irrors
inw ards w hen driving through a
narrow space,like an autom atic car
w ash.
Heated outside mirrors (if equipped)
Both m irrors are heated
autom atically to rem ove ice,m ist
and fog w hen the rear w indow
defrost is activated.
Do not remove ice fromthe
mirrors with a scraper or
attempt to readjust the mirror
glass if it is frozen in place.
These actions couldcause
damage to the glass andmirrors.
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
W ith speed controlset,you can m aintain a speed of30 m ph (48 km /h)
or m ore w ithout keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.Speed
controldoes not w ork at speeds below 30 m ph (48 km /h).
D o not use the speed controlin heavy traffic or on roads that
are w inding,slippery or unpaved.
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
controlare located on the steering
w heelfor your convenience.
1.Press the O N controland release
it.
2.A ccelerate to the desired speed.
O N
O F F
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
58
3.Press the SE T A CC controland
release it.
4.Take your foot offthe accelerator
pedal.
5.The indicator light on the
instrum ent cluster w illturn on.
Note:
Vehicle speed m ay vary m om entarily w hen driving up and dow n a
steep hill.
Ifthe vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a dow nhill,you
m ay w ant to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
Ifthe vehicle speed decreases m ore than 10 m ph (16 km /h) below
your set speed on an uphill,your speed controlw illdisengage.
Resuming a set speed
Press the RSM controland release
it.This w illautom atically return the
vehicle to the previously set speed.
The RSM controlw illnot w ork ifthe
vehicle speed is not faster than
30 m ph (48 km /h).
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are tw o w ays to set a higher
speed:
Press and hold the SE T A CC
controluntilyou get to the
desired speed,then release the
control.You can also use the SE T
A CC controlto operate the
Tap-U p function.Press and
release this controlto increase the vehicle set speed in sm allam ounts
by 1 m ph (1.6 km /h).
U se the accelerator pedalto get to the desired speed.W hen the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SE T A CC control.
R S M
S E T
A C C
C S T
R S M
S E T
A C C
C S T
R S M
S E T
A C C
C S T
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
59
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are tw o w ays to reduce a set
speed:
Press and hold the CST control
untilyou get to the desired
speed,then release the control.
You can also use the CST control
to operate the Tap-D ow n
function.Press and release this
controlto decrease the vehicle set speed in sm allam ounts by 1 m ph
(1.6 km /h).
D epress the brake pedaluntilthe
desired vehicle speed is reached,
press the SE T A CC control.
Turning off speed control
There are tw o w ays to turn offthe speed control:
D epress the brake pedalor the clutch pedal(ifequipped).This w ill
not erase your vehicles previously set speed.
Press the speed controlO FF
control.
Note: W hen you turn offthe speed
controlor the ignition,your speed
controlset speed m em ory is erased.
R S M
S E T
A C C
C S T
R S M
S E T
A C C
C S T
O N
O F F
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
60
MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
To operate the m oon roof:
Note: The m oon roofw illopen to
the comfort position first before
opening allthe w ay.The com fort
position helps to alleviate rum bling
w ind noise w hich m ay happen in the
vehicle w ith the rooffully opened.
The m oon roofis equipped w ith
an autom atic,one-touch,express
opening feature.Press and release the rear portion ofthe control.The
m oon roofw illopen to the com fortposition.Press and release the
controlagain to fully open.To stop m otion at any tim e during the
one-touch opening,press the controlagain.
To close,press and hold the front portion ofthe control.
To operate the m oon roofvent position:
To open,press and hold the front portion ofthe control.This w ill
open the vent.
To close,press and hold the rear portion ofthe control.
Note: Ifthe battery is disconnected,discharged,or a new battery is
installed,the m oon roofneeds to be opened to the vent position to reset
the m oon roofpositions.
Ifyou open and close the m oon roofrepeatedly,the m oon roofm otor
m ay overheat and shut dow n for 45 seconds w hile the m otor cools.
D o not let children play w ith the m oon roofor leave children
unattended in the vehicle.They m ay seriously hurt them selves.
W hen closing the m oon roof,you should verify that it is free of
obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the
proxim ity ofthe m oon roofopening.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
61
MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
W ith the ignition in the O N position,
the m essage center,located on your
instrum ent cluster,displays
im portant vehicle inform ation
through a constant monitor of
vehicle systems. You m ay select
display features on the m essage
center for a display ofstatus preceded by a briefindicator chim e.The
system w illalso notify you ofpotentialvehicle problem s w ith a display of
system w arnings follow ed by a long indicator chim e.
Selectable features
Set
This button is used to select and
reset various functions show n in the
IN FO M enu.
Info menu
This controldisplays the follow ing
controldisplays:
Average FuelE conom y
D istance to E m pty
Instantaneous FuelE conom y
FuelAvailable
System Check
U nits (E nglish/M etric)
Language
IN FO D isplay on/off
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
62
Average fuel economy (AFE)
Select this function from the IN FO
m enu to display your average fuel
econom y in m iles/gallon or liters/100
km .
Ifyou calculate your average fuel
econom y by dividing gallons offuel
used by 100 m iles traveled (kilom eters traveled by liters used),your
figure m ay be different than displayed for the follow ing reasons:
your vehicle w as not perfectly levelduring fill-up
differences in the autom atic shut-offpoints on the fuelpum ps at
service stations
variations in top-offprocedure from one fill-up to another
rounding ofthe displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1.D rive the vehicle at least 8 km (5 m iles) w ith the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2.Record the highw ay fueleconom y for future reference.
It is im portant to press the SE T controlafter setting the speed controlto
get accurate highw ay fueleconom y readings.
Distance to empty (DTE)
Selecting this function from the
IN FO m enu w illgive you an
estim ate ofhow far you can drive
w ith the fuelrem aining in your tank
under norm aldriving conditions.
Rem em ber to turn the ignition O FF
w hen refueling your vehicle.O therw ise,the display w illnot show the
addition offuelfor a few kilom eters (m iles).
The D TE function w illdisplay LO W FU E L LE VE Land sound a tone for
one second w hen you have low fuellevelindicated on the fuelgauge.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
63
Instantaneous fuel economy
Press IN FO untilthe m enu displays
IN STA N T E CO N .This w illdisplay
your fueleconom y as a Bar G raph
ranging from Lpoor econom y to
H excellent econom y.
Your vehicle m ust be m oving to
calculate instantaneous fueleconom y.W hen your vehicle is not m oving,
this function show s L,one or no bars illum inated.Instantaneous fuel
econom y cannot be reset.
Fuel available
IN FO m enu w illshow you how
m uch fuelis available in your tank.
Units (English/Metric)
1.Select this function from the
IN FO m enu for the current units to
be displayed.
2.Press the SE T controlto change
from E nglish to M etric.
System check
IN FO m enu causes the m essage
center to cycle through each ofthe
system s being m onitored.For each
ofthe m onitored system s,the
m essage center w illindicate either
an O K m essage or a w arning
m essage for three seconds.
Pressing the SE T controlcycles the m essage center through each ofthe
system s being m onitored.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
64
The sequence ofthe system check report is as follow s:
1.O ilChange Rem inder
2.Charging System
3.E m ission Status
4.Brake System
5.Tire Pressure M onitoring System
6.Liftgate Status
7.E xterior Lam ps
8.4 W heelD rive
9.FuelLevelStatus
Language
IN FO m enu for the current language
to be displayed.
2.Pressing the SE T controlcycles
the m essage center through each of
the language choices.
3.Press and hold the SE T control
for 2 seconds to set the language
choice.
Display Off
Select this function from the IN FO controlto turn your m essage center
display O FF.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
65
System warnings
System w arnings alert you to possible problem s or m alfunctions in your
vehicles operating system s.
In the event ofa m ultiple w arning situation,the m essage center w ill
cycle the display to show allw arnings by displaying each one for four
seconds.
The m essage center w illdisplay the last selected feature ifthere are no
m ore w arning m essages.This allow s you to use the fullfunctionality of
the m essage center after you acknow ledge the w arning by pressing the
SE T controland clearing the w arning m essage.
W arning m essages that have been reset are divided into tw o categories:
They w illreappear on the display ten m inutes from the reset.
They w illnot reappear untilan ignition O FF-O N cycle has been
com pleted.
This acts as a rem inder that these w arning conditions stillexist w ithin
the vehicle.
Warnings Status
H igh engine tem perature W arning cannot be reset
D river door ajar
Passenger door ajar
Rear left door ajar
Rear right door ajar
Park brake on W arning returns after 10 m inutes
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
66
Warnings Status
Liftgate ajar W arning returns after the ignition key
is turned from O FF to O N . Service em ission sys
Check fuelcap
Low brake fluid
Low tire pressure
Tire pressure m onitor fault
Tire pressure sensor fault
Service brake system
Check left headlam p
Check right headlam p
Check left high beam
Check right high beam
Check left turn lam ps
Check right turn lam ps
E ngine change oilsoon
E ngine oilchange now
Low fuel
Service 4W D
Turn signalon
4W D locked tem porarily (if
equipped)
Tem porary alert
4W D disabled tem porarily (if
equipped)
4W D auto restored (if
equipped)
HIGH ENGINE TEMPERATURE. D isplayed w hen the engine is
overheating.Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible,turn offthe
engine and let it cool.Check the coolant and coolant level.Refer to
Engi ne coolant in the Mai ntenance and Speci fi cati ons chapter.Ifthe
w arning stays on or continues to com e on,contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
running or hot.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
67
DRIVER DOOR AJ AR. D isplayed w hen the driver door is not
com pletely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJ AR. D isplayed w hen the passenger door is not
com pletely closed.
REAR LEFT DOOR AJ AR. D isplayed w hen the rear left door is not
com pletely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJ AR. D isplayed w hen the rear right door is not
com pletely closed.
LIFTGATE AJ AR. D isplayed w hen the liftgate or liftgate glass is not
com pletely closed.Press SE T to reset display.
PARK BRAKE ON. D isplayed w hen the park brake is on.Ifthe w arning
stays on after the park brake is off,contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
CHECK FUEL CAP. D isplayed w hen the fuelfiller cap is not properly
installed.Check the fuelfiller cap for proper installation.Refer to Fuel
fi ller cap in the Mai ntenance and Speci fi cati ons chapter.
SERVICE EMISSION SYS. D isplayed w hen the engine has defaulted to
a lim p-hom eoperation.Ifthe w arning stays on or continues to com e on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
LOWTIRE PRESSURE. D isplayed w hen one or m ore tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure.Refer to Inflati ng Your Ti res in the
Ti res, Wheels and Loadi ng chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT. D isplayed w hen the Tire
Pressure M onitoring System is m alfunctioning.Ifthe w arning stays on or
continues to com e on,have the system inspected by your authorized
dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT. D isplayed w hen a tire pressure
sensor is m alfunctioning,or your spare tire is in use.For m ore
inform ation on how the system operates under these conditions,refer to
Understandi ng Your Ti re Pressure Moni tori ng System in the Ti res,
Wheels and Loadi ng chapter.Ifthe w arning stays on or continues to
com e on,have the system inspected by your authorized dealer
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM. D isplayed w hen the braking system is not
operating properly.Ifthe w arning stays on or continues to com e on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CHECK LEFT OR RIGHT HEADLAMPS. D isplayed w hen the
headlam ps are activated and at least one is burned out.Check the lam ps
as soon as possible and have the burned out lam p replaced.Refer to
Replaci ng headlamp bulbs in the Li ghts chapter.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
68
CHECK LEFT OR RIGHT HIGH BEAMS. D isplayed w hen the
headlam ps are activated and at least one is burned out.Check the lam ps
as soon as possible and have the burned out lam p replaced.Refer to
Replaci ng headlamp bulbs in the Li ghts chapter.
CHECK LEFT OR RIGHT TURN LAMPS. D isplayed w hen the turn
signals are activated and at least one is burned out.Check the lam ps as
soon as safely possible and have the burned out lam p replaced.
LOWFUEL. D isplayed as an early rem inder ofa low fuelcondition.
SERVICE 4WD. D isplayed w hen the 4X 4 is not operating properly.If
the w arning stays on or continues to com e on,contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TURN SIGNAL ON. D isplayed w hen the turn signalis activated and the
vehicle is driven m ore than 2 m iles (3.3 km ).
4WD LOCKED TEMPORARILY (if equipped). D isplayed w hen the
4X 4 is tem porarily locked.Ifthe w arning stays on or continues to com e
on,contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
4WD DISABLED TEMPORARILY (if equipped). D isplayed w hen the
4X 4 is tem porarily disabled.Ifthe w arning stays on or continues to com e
on,contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
4WD AUTO RESTORED (if equipped). D isplayed w hen the 4X 4 is
restored to norm aloperations.
ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON/ENGINE OIL CHANGE NOW.
D isplayed w hen the engine oillife rem aining is 5% or less.W hen oillife
left is betw een 5% and 0% ,the E N G IN E O IL CH A N G E SO O N m essage
w illbe displayed.W hen oillife left reaches 0% ,the E N G IN E O IL
CH A N G E N O W m essage w illbe displayed.
A n oilchange is required w henever indicated by the m essage center.
U SE O N LY RE CO M M E N D E D E N G IN E O ILS.
To reset the oilm onitoring system to 100% after each oilchange
[approxim ately 5,000 m iles (8,000 km ) or 12 m onths]perform the
follow ing:
IN FO m enu then press the SE T
controlto access the system check
function.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
69
2.Press and release the SE T control
to display O IL CH N G X X X % H O LD
SE T N E W .
3.Press and hold the SE T control
for 2 seconds to display O IL
CH A N G E SE T TO 100% .
INFO UNAVAIL. These m essages indicate im proper operation ofthe
vehicle netw ork com m unication system s for the follow ing vehicle
m odules.
Fuelcom puter
Charging system
D oor sensor
Brakes
E xterior lam ps
E m issions system
4W D info
Contact your Ford D ealer as soon as possible ifthese m essages occur on
a regular basis.
LIFTGATE
To open the rear w indow,pullthe
right side ofthe liftgate handle.
To open the liftgate,pullthe left
side ofthe liftgate handle.
D o not open the liftgate or
liftgate glass in a garage or other
enclosed area w ith a low ceiling.
Ifthe liftgate glass is raised and
the liftgate is also opened,both
liftgate and glass could be
dam aged against a low ceiling.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
70
D o not leave the liftgate or liftgate glass open w hile driving.D oing so
could cause serious dam age to the liftgate and its com ponents as w ell
as allow ing carbon m onoxide to enter the vehicle.
M ake sure that the liftgate door and/or w indow are closed to
prevent exhaust fum es from being draw n into the vehicle.
E xhaust fum es contain carbon m onoxide w hich can injure your lungs
and cause drow siness and even death.This w illalso prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out.Ifyou m ust drive w ith the
liftgate door or w indow open,keep the vents open so outside air com es
into the vehicle.
CARGO SHADE (IF EQUIPPED)
Ifyour vehicle has a cargo shade,you can use it to cover item s in the
cargo area ofyour vehicle.
To installthe shade:
Insert the ends ofthe cargo
shade into the m ounting features
located behind the rear seat on
the rear trim panels.
To operate the shade:
1.G rasp the handle at the rear edge
ofthe shade and pullrearw ard.
2.Secure both ends ofthe support
rod into the retention slots located
on the rear quarter trim panels.
E nsure that the posts are properly latched in m ounting features.
The cover m ay cause injury in a sudden stop or accident ifit is
not securely installed.
D o not place any objects on the cargo area shade.They m ay
obstruct your vision or strike occupants ofvehicle in the case of
a sudden stop or collision.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
71
Cargo management system (if equipped)
The cargo m anagem ent system consists ofa storage com partm ent
located in the floor ofthe rear cargo area.
1.To open,lift the release handle
and the lid.The lid can be rem oved
to allow for extra storage.
2.To close,low er the lid and push
handle untillatch clicks.
This storage com partm ent is not designed to restrain objects
during a collision w ith the lid rem oved.
LUGGAGE RACK
Your vehicle m ay be equipped w ith a
roofrack.The m axim um load for
the roofrack is 100 lbs (44 kg),
evenly distributed on the cross-bars.
Ifit is not possible to evenly
distribute the load,position it in the
center or as far forw ard on the
cross-bars as possible.
Do not use the vehicles door
handles as tie down loops.
To adjust the cross-bar (if equipped) position:
1.Loosen the thum bw heelat both
ends ofthe cross-bar (both
cross-bars are adjustable).
2.Slide the cross-bar to the desired
location.
3.Tighten the thum bw heelat both
ends ofthe cross-bar.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
72
To remove the cross-bar assembly (if equipped) from the roof rack
side rails:
1.Loosen the thum bw heelat both
ends ofthe cross-bar (both
cross-bars are adjustable).
2.Slide the cross-bar to the end of
the rail.
3.U se a long,flat object to depress
the tongue in the endcaps on both
sides ofthe cross-bar.
4.Slide the cross-bar assem bly off
the end ofthe rail.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
73
To reinstall the cross-bar assembly (if equipped) to the roof rack
side rails:
1.E nsure that both cross-bar
assem blies are installed w ith the F
(front) arrow facing tow ards the
front ofthe vehicle.
2.U se a long,flat object to depress
the tongue in the endcaps on both
sides ofthe cross-bar.
3.Slide the cross-bar assem blies
over the end cap tongue and into
the side rails.
4.Tighten thum bw heelat both ends
ofthe cross-bar.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
74
KEYS
O ne key operates allthe locks and starts the vehicle.A lw ays carry a
spare key w ith you in case ofan em ergency.
Your keys are program m ed to your vehicle;using a non-program m ed key
w illnot perm it your vehicle to start.Ifyou lose your authorized dealer
supplied keys,replacem ent keys are available through your authorized
dealer.Refer to the Securi Lock passi ve anti -theft system section later
in this chapter for m ore inform ation.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The pow er door lock controls are
located on the driver and front
passenger door panels.
Pressing the w illunlock allthe
doors.Pressing the w illlock all
the doors.
Power door lock/unlock inhibit feature
A s a theft deterrent,the pow er door lock controls can be disabled 20
seconds after the ignition has been turned to the 1 (LO CK ) position and
the vehicle is locked using the rem ote entry transm itter or the key in the
door lock cylinder.The door lock controls are enabled w hen the vehicle
is unlocked using the key in the door lock cylinder or by pressing on
the rem ote entry transm itter.This feature can be turned on or offusing
the follow ing procedure:
Before starting,ensure the ignition is in the 1 (LO CK ) position and all
vehicle doors are closed.You m ust com plete Steps 15 w ithin 30 seconds
or the procedure w illhave to be repeated.
1.Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the 3 (RU N ) position.
2.Press the pow er door unlock controlon the door panelthree tim es.
3.Turn the ignition from the 3 (RU N ) position to the 1 (LO CK ) position.
4.Press the pow er door unlock controlon the door panelthree tim es.
5.Turn the ignition back to the 3 (RU N ) position.The horn w illchirp
one tim e to confirm program m ing m ode has been entered and is active.
6.Press the pow er door lock controlon the door paneltw o tim es w ithin five
seconds.The horn w illchirp tw o tim es to confirm the feature is off;the
horn w illchirp tw o tim es and honk one tim e to confirm the feature is on.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
75
The horn w illchirp one tim e to confirm the program m ing m ode has been
exited.
Repeat the procedure to turn the feature on or off.
Door key unlocking/locking
Two step door unlocking
1.Turn the key in the door cylinder to unlock the drivers door.Note:
The interior lam ps w illillum inate ifthe controlon the overhead lam p is
in the D O O R position and the perim eter alarm system (ifequipped) w ill
deactivate.For m ore inform ation,refer to Illumi nated entry later in this
chapter.
2.Turn the key in the door cylinder again w ithin three seconds to unlock
the passenger doors,the liftgate and liftgate glass.
One step door unlocking
Ifthe one step door unlocking feature is activated,turn the key in the
door cylinder once to unlock allofthe doors ,the liftgate and liftgate
glass.Note: The interior lam ps w illillum inate (refer to the Illumi nated
entry feature later in this section),ifthe controlon the overhead lam p is
in the D O O R position.For inform ation on sw itching from tw o step to one
step door unlocking,refer to Swi tchi ng from two step to one step door
unlocki ng later in this chapter.
Locking the doors
Turn the key in the door cylinder to lock allthe doors.The park/turn
lam ps w illflash once and the perim eter alarm (ifequipped) w illstart the
arm ing process.For m ore inform ation concerning the perim eter alarm ,
refer to Peri meter alarm system (i f equi pped) later in this chapter.
Ifany ofthe doors,the liftgate or the hood are not properly closed the
park/turn lam ps w illnot flash.
Autolock (if equipped)
The autolock feature autom atically locks allvehicle doors w hen:
alldoors are closed,
the ignition is in the 3 (RU N ) position,
the brake has been released and
the vehicle has been set in m otion.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
76
Relock
This feature w illalso autom atically relock allthe doors w hen:
the ignition is in the 3 (RU N ) position and any door is opened then
closed,and
you put the vehicle in m otion by releasing the brake pedal.
Deactivating/activating the autolock feature
The autolock feature can be turned on or offusing the follow ing
procedure:
Before starting,m ake sure the ignition is in the 1 (LO CK ) position and
allvehicle doors are closed.
You m ust com plete Steps 1-5 w ithin 30 seconds or the procedure w ill
have to be repeated.
1.Turn the ignition to the 3 (RU N ) position.
2.Press the pow er door unlock control(on the door panel) three tim es.
4.Press the pow er door unlock controlthree tim es.
5.Turn the ignition from the 1 (LO CK ) position to the 3 (RU N ) position.
6.The horn w illchirp once to confirm program m ing m ode is
entered/active.
7.Press the pow er door unlock controlon the door panelone tim e.
8.Press the pow er door lock controlon the door panelone tim e.Note:
The horn w illchirp once to confirm the feature is O FF,or the horn w ill
chirp and then honk to confirm the feature is O N .
9.Turn the ignition to the 1 (LO CK ) position.Note: The horn w illchirp
once to confirm the program m ing m ode has been exited.
Repeat the previous procedure to turn the feature on or off.
Smart unlocking feature
The sm art unlocking feature helps prevent you from locking yourselfout
ofthe vehicle.W ith the key in any ignition position,the drivers door w ill
autom atically unlock ifit is locked using the pow er lock controlon the
drivers door panelw hile the drivers door is open.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
77
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS
W hen these locks are set,the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
The rear doors can be opened
from the outside w hen the doors
are unlocked.
The childprooflocks are located on
rear edge ofeach rear door and
m ust be set separately for each
door.Setting the lock for one door
w illnot autom atically set the lock
for both doors.
Rotate lock controlin the
direction ofarrow to engage the
lock.
Rotate controlin the opposite
direction to disengage childproof
locks.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
This device com plies w ith part 15 ofthe FCC rules and w ith RS-210 of
Industry Canada.O peration is subject to the follow ing tw o conditions:
(1) This device m ay not cause harm fulinterference,and (2) This device
m ust accept any interference received,including interference that m ay
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approvedby the party
responsible for compliance couldvoidthe users authority to
operate the equipment.
The typicaloperating range for your rem ote entry transm itter is
approxim ately 33 feet (10 m eters).A decrease in operating range could
be caused by:
w eather conditions,
nearby radio tow ers,
structures around the vehicle,
other vehicles parked next to your vehicle,or
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
78
w eak or dead transm itter battery.
The rem ote entry system allow s you
to lock or unlock allvehicle doors
w ithout a key.The rem ote locking
and unlocking features w illoperate
independent ofthe ignition position;
how ever,the panic feature w illonly
operate w hen the ignition is in the 1
(LO CK ) or 2 (A CCE SSO RY)
position.
Ifthere are problem s w ith the
rem ote entry system ,m ake sure to
take ALL remote entry transmitters w ith you to the authorized dealer
in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem .
Two step door unlocking
1.Press and release to unlock the drivers door.Note: The interior
lam ps w illillum inate ifthe controlon the overhead lam p is in the D O O R
position and the perim eter alarm system (ifequipped) w illdeactivate.
2.Press and release again w ithin three seconds to unlock the
passenger doors,the liftgate and liftgate glass.
The battery saver feature w illturn offthe interior lam ps 30 m inutes after
the ignition is turned to the 1 (O FF/LO CK ) position.
One step door unlocking
Ifthe one step door unlocking feature is activated,press and release
once to unlock allofthe doors,the liftgate and liftgate glass.Note: The
interior lam ps w illillum inate (refer to the Illumi nated entry feature
later in this section),ifthe controlon the overhead lam p is in the D O O R
position and the perim eter alarm system (ifequipped) w illdeactivate.
Switching from two step to one step door unlocking
U nlocking can be sw itched betw een tw o step and one step door
unlocking by pressing and holding both and buttons
sim ultaneously on the rem ote entry transm itter for approxim ately 4
seconds.The parklam ps w illflash tw ice to indicate that the vehicle has
sw itched to one step unlocking.Repeat the procedure to sw itch back to
tw o step unlocking.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
79
Locking the doors
1.Press and release to lock allthe doors.A ssum ing allvehicle doors
and the liftgate are properly closed,the park/turn lam ps w illflash once
and the perim eter alarm (ifequipped) w illstart the arm ing process.For
m ore inform ation concerning the perim eter alarm ,refer to Peri meter
alarm system (i f equi pped) later in this chapter.
2.Press and release again w ithin three seconds to confirm that allthe
doors and liftgate are closed and locked.Note: The doors w illlock again
and the horn w illchirp once.
Ifany ofthe doors or the hood are not properly closed,the horn w ill
chirp tw ice and park/turn lam ps w illnot flash w hen the controlis
pressed.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press to activate the alarm .To deactivate the feature,press the
controlagain,turn the ignition to the 3 (RU N ) or 4 (STA RT) position,or
w ait for the alarm to tim e out in approxim ately 3 m inutes.
Note: The panic alarm w illonly operate w hen the ignition is in the 1
(LO CK ) or 2 (A CCE SSO RY) position.
Replacing the battery
The rem ote entry transm itter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1.Tw ist a thin coin betw een the tw o
halves ofthe rem ote entry
transm itter near the key ring.D O
N O T TA K E TH E RU BBE R CO VE R
A N D CIRCU IT BO A RD O FF TH E
FRO N T H O U SIN G O F TH E
RE M O TE E N TRY TRA N SM ITTE R.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
80
2.D o not w ipe offany grease on the
battery term inals on the back
surface ofthe circuit board.
3.Rem ove the old battery.Note: Please refer to localregulations w hen
disposing oftransm itter batteries.
4.Insert the new battery.Refer to the diagram inside the rem ote entry
transm itter for the correct orientation ofthe battery.Press the battery
dow n to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing
cavity.
5.Snap the tw o halves back together.
Note: Replacem ent ofthe battery w illnot cause the rem ote transm itter
to becom e deprogram m ed from your vehicle.The rem ote transm itter
should operate norm ally after battery replacem ent.
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters
Ifyou w ould like to have your rem ote entry transm itter reprogram m ed
because you lost one,or w ould like to buy additionalrem ote entry
transm itters,you can either reprogram them yourself,or take all
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for
reprogram m ing.
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters
You m ust have all remote entry transmitters (m axim um offour)
available before beginning this procedure.Note: Ifallrem ote entry
transm itters are not present during the program m ing procedure,the
m issing transm itters w illnot w ork w ith the vehicle follow ing
program m ing.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
81
To reprogram the rem ote entry
transm itters:
1.E nsure the vehicle is electronically unlocked.
2.Put the key in the ignition.
3.Turn the key from the 1 (LO CK ) position to 3 (RU N ).
4.Cycle eight tim es rapidly (w ithin 10 seconds) betw een the 1 (LO CK )
position and 3 (RU N ).Note: The eighth turn m ust end in the 3 (RU N )
position.
5.The doors w illlock,then unlock,to confirm that the program m ing
m ode has been activated.
6.W ithin 20 seconds press any button on the rem ote entry transm itter.
Note: Ifm ore than 20 seconds have passed you w illneed to start the
procedure over again.
7.The doors w illlock,then unlock,to confirm that this rem ote entry
transm itter has been program m ed.
8.Repeat Step 6 to program each additionalrem ote entry transm itter.
9.Turn the ignition to the 1 (LO CK ) position after you have finished
program m ing allofthe rem ote entry transm itters.
10.The doors w illlock,then unlock,to confirm that the program m ing
m ode has been exited.
Illuminated entry
The interior lam ps illum inate w hen the rem ote entry system is used to
unlock the door(s).
The illum inated entry system w illturn offthe interior lights if:
the ignition sw itch is turned to the 2 (A CCE SSO RY) position,or
the rem ote transm itter lock controlis pressed,or
the doors are locked by key in the door cylinder,or
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
82
after 25 seconds ofillum ination.
Illuminated exit
The interior lights w illillum inate w hen the key is rem oved from the
ignition.
The lam ps autom atically turn offafter 25 seconds.The dom e and cargo
lam p controls m ust not be set to the O FF position for the illum inated
exit system to operate.
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to lock or unlock the doors
w ithout using a key.
The keypad can be operated w ith
the factory set 5digit entry code;
this code is located on the ow ners w allet card in the glove box and is
available from your authorized dealer.You can also create your ow n
5digit personalentry code.
W hen pressing the controls on the keypad,press the m iddle ofthe
controls to ensure a good activation.
Anti-scan feature
Ifan incorrect code has been entered 7 tim es (35 consecutive button
presses),the keypad w illgo into an anti-scan m ode.This m ode disables
the keypad for one m inute and the keypad lam p w illflash during this
tim e.
The anti-scan feature w illturn offafter:
one m inute ofkeypad inactivity.
pressing the controlon the rem ote entry transm itter.
the ignition is turned to the 3 (RU N ) position.
Programming a personal entry code
To create your ow n personalentry code:
1.E nter the factory set code.Note: The keyless entry keypad and
interior lights w illillum inate and the drivers door w illunlock.
2.W ithin five seconds press the 1 2 on the keypad.
3.E nter your personal5-digit code.E ach num ber m ust be entered
w ithin five seconds ofeach other.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
83
4.The doors w illagain lock then unlock,to confirm that your personal
keycode has been program m ed to the m odule.
Tips:
D o not set a code that uses five ofthe sam e num ber.
D o not use five num bers in sequentialorder.
The factory set code w illw ork even ifyou have set your ow n personal
code.
Ifyou set a second personalcode it w illerase your first personalcode.
Note: To exit program m ing m ode,either w ait 5 seconds after pressing 1
2 on the keypad,or press the 7 8 and 9 0 pads sim ultaneously to
lock allvehicle doors and end program m ing m ode.
Erasing personal codes
1.E nter the factory set 5digit code.The keyless entry keypad and
interior lights w illillum inate and the drivers door w illunlock.
2.Press and release the 1 2 w ithin five seconds ofcom pleting Step 1.
3.Press and hold the 1 2 for tw o seconds to erase the custom er
program m ed codes.
A llpersonalcodes are now erased and only the factory set 5digit code
w illw ork.
Note: To exit program m ing m ode,either w ait 5 seconds after pressing 1
2 on the keypad,or press the 7 8 and 9 0 pads sim ultaneously to
lock allvehicle doors and end program m ing m ode.
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry
To unlock the drivers door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personalcode.E ach num ber m ust be pressed w ithin five seconds ofeach
other.The interior lam ps w illillum inate.
To unlock all doors andthe liftgate, enter the factory set code or
your personalcode,then press the 3 4 controlw ithin five seconds.
To lock all doors, press the 7 8 and the 9 0 at the sam e tim e.You
do not need to enter the keypad code first.
SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is an engine im m obilization
system .This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a codedkey programmedto your vehicle is used.The
use ofthe w rong type ofcoded key m ay lead to a no-startcondition.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
84
Your vehicle com es w ith tw o coded keys;additionalcoded keys m ay be
purchased from your authorized dealer.The authorized dealer can
program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys
yourself.Refer to Programmi ng spare keys for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is not com patible w ith
non-Ford afterm arket rem ote start system s.U se ofthese system s m ay
result in vehicle starting problem s and a loss ofsecurity protection.
Note: Large m etallic objects,electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or sim ilar item s,or a second coded key on the sam e
key chain m ay cause vehicle starting issues.You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key w hile starting the engine.These
objects w illnot cause dam age to the coded key,but m ay cause a
m om entary issue ifthey are too close to the key w hen starting the
engine.Ifa problem occurs,turn the ignition off,rem ove allobjects on
the key chain aw ay from the coded key and restart the engine.
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in
the instrum ent cluster.
W hen the ignition is in the 1 (LO CK ) position,the anti-theft indicator
w illflash once every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is
functioning as a theft deterrent.
W hen the ignition is in the 3 (RU N ) position,the anti-theft indicator
w illglow for 3 seconds,then turn offto indicate norm alsystem
functionality.
Ifa problem occurs w ith the SecuriLock system ,the indicator w illflash
rapidly or glow steadily w hen the ignition is in the 3 (RU N ) position.If
this occurs,the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for
service.
Replacement keys
Ifyour keys are lost or stolen and you dont have an extra coded key,
you w illneed to have your vehicle tow ed to an authorized dealer.The
key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys w ill
need to be program m ed.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
85
Replacing coded keys can be very costly.Store an extra program m ed key
aw ay from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences.Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacem ent keys.
Programming spare keys
You can program your ow n coded keys to your vehicle.
Tips:
A m axim um ofeight keys can be coded to your vehicle.
O nly use SecuriLock keys.
You m ust have tw o previously program m ed coded keys (keys that
already operate your vehicles engine) and the new unprogram m ed
key(s) readily accessible.
Iftw o previously program m ed coded keys are not available,you m ust
take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s)
program m ed.
Please read and understand the
entire procedure before you begin.
1.Insert the first previously
program m ed codedkey into the
ignition.
K eep the ignition in the 3 (RU N ) position for at least three seconds,but
no m ore than 10 seconds.
3.Turn the ignition to the 1 (LO CK ) position and rem ove the first coded
key from the ignition.
4.W ithin ten seconds ofturning the ignition to the 1 (LO CK ) position,
insert the second previously codedkey into the ignition.
K eep the ignition in the 3 (RU N ) position for at least three seconds,but
no m ore than 10 seconds.
6.Turn the ignition to the 1 (LO CK ) position and rem ove the second
previously program m ed codedkey from the ignition.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
86
7.W ithin tw enty seconds ofturning the ignition to the 1 (LO CK )
position and rem oving the previously program m ed codedkey, insert the
new unprogram m ed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition.
K eep the ignition in the 3 (RU N ) position for at least three seconds but
not m ore than 10 seconds.
9.Rem ove the new ly program m ed codedkey from the ignition.
Ifthe key has been successfully program m ed it w illstart the vehicles
engine and the theft indicator light w illillum inate for three seconds and
then go out.
Ifthe key w as not successfully program m ed,it w illnot start your
vehicles engine and the theft indicator light w illflash on and off;you
m ay need to repeat Steps 1 through 5.Iffailure repeats,bring your
vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new key(s) program m ed.
To program additionalnew unprogram m ed key(s),w ait tw enty seconds
and then repeat this procedure from Step 1.
PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The perim eter anti-theft system w illw arn you in the event ofan
unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
Ifthere is any potentialperim eter anti-theft problem w ith your vehicle,
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the authorized
dealer to aid in troubleshooting.
Arming the system
W hen arm ed,this system w illrespond ifunauthorized entry is
attem pted.W hen unauthorized entry occurs,the system w illflash the
park/turn lam ps and w illsound the horn.
The system is ready to arm w henever the key is rem oved from the
ignition.A ny ofthe follow ing actions w illprearm the alarm system :
Press the controlon the rem ote entry transm itter.
Lock the doors w ith the key in the key cylinder.
O pen the drivers door and press the pow er door lock controlto lock
allthe doors,and then close the door.
Note: The doors,liftgate and hood w illarm individually,and ifany of
them are open,they m ust be closed in order to be arm ed.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
87
W hen you lock the vehicle using any ofthe m ethods above:
the park/turn lam ps w illflash once to indicate the hood,each door
and the liftgate are closed.
the park/turn lam ps w illnot flash ifthe hood,any door or the liftgate
are open.O nce alldoors,hood and liftgate are closed,the park/turn
lam ps w illflash to confirm the alarm w illbe set.
W hen the vehicle is locked,the alarm is set after a 20second arm ing
period.
W hen you press the controlon the rem ote entry transm itter tw ice
w ithin three seconds,the horn w illchirp once to confirm the doors,
liftgate and hood are closed and locked,and the alarm is set.
Disarming the system
You can disarm the system by any ofthe follow ing actions:
U nlock the doors by pressing the controlon your rem ote entry
transm itter.
U nlock the doors w ith a key.Turn the key fulltravel(tow ard the front
ofthe vehicle) to ensure the alarm disarm s.
Turning the key in the ignition to the 3 (RU N ) or 4 (STA RT) position.
Note: The key m ust be a valid,program m ed,coded key.
Triggering the anti-theft system
The arm ed system w illbe triggered ifany door,liftgate or the hood is
opened w ithout using the key or the rem ote entry transm itter.
To deactivate the triggered alarm state:
U nlock the doors by pressing the controlon your rem ote entry
transm itter.
U nlock the doors w ith a key.Turn the key fulltravel(tow ard the front
ofthe vehicle) to ensure the alarm disarm s.
Press on the rem ote entry transm itter to disable the alarm ;the
alarm w illbe disabled,but the vehicle w illrem ain in an arm ed state.
Turning the key in the ignition to the 3 (RU N ) or 4 (STA RT) position.
Note: The key m ust be a valid,program m ed,coded key.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
88
FRONT SEATS
Notes:
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seats safety belt,resulting in severe personalinjuries in the
event ofa collision.
D o not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.
Before returning the seatback to its originalposition,m ake sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
A fter returning the seatback to its originalposition,pullon the
seatback to ensure that it has fully latched.A n unlatched seat m ay
becom e dangerous in the event ofa sudden stop or collision.
Adjustable head restraints
The purpose ofthese head restraints is to help lim it head m otion in the
event ofa rear collision.To properly adjust your head restraints,lift the
head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close
to that position as possible.
The head restraints can be m oved
up and dow n.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
89
Push side controland push dow n on
head restraint to low er it.
Adjusting the front manual seat
Lift handle to m ove seat forw ard or
backw ard.
Pulllever up to adjust seatback.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
N ever adjust the drivers seat or seatback w hen the vehicle is
m oving.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
90
D o not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring
people in a collision or sudden stop.
A lw ays drive and ride w ith your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seats safety belt,resulting in severe personalinjuries in the
event ofa collision.
Sitting im properly out ofposition or w ith the seat back reclined
too far can take offw eight from the seat cushion and affect the
decision ofthe passenger sensing system ,resulting in serious injury or
death in a crash.A lw ays sit upright against your seatback,w ith your
feet on the floor.
To reduce the risk ofpossible serious injury:D o not hang objects
offseat back or stow objects in the seatback m ap pocket (if
equipped) w hen a child is in the front passenger seat.D o not place
objects underneath the front passenger seat or betw een the seat and
the center console (ifequipped).Check the passenger airbag offor
pass airbag offindicator lam p for proper airbag status.Refer to Front
passenger sensi ng system section for additionaldetails.Failure to
follow these instructions m ay interfere w ith the front passenger seat
sensing system .
The controlis located on the outboard side ofthe seat cushion.
Press to raise or low er the front
portion ofthe seat cushion.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
91
Press to raise or low er the rear
portion ofthe seat cushion.
Press the controlto m ove the seat
forw ard,backw ard,up or dow n.
Heated seats (if equipped)
To operate the heated seats:
Push the controllocated on the
seat to activate.
Push again to deactivate.
The heated seats w illactivate w hen the ignition is in the RU N position.
REAR SEATS
Head restraints
The purpose ofthese head restraints is to help lim it head m otion in the
event ofa rear collision.To properly adjust your head restraints,lift the
head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close
to that position as possible.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
92
The head restraints can be m oved
up and dow n.Lift the head restraint
so that it is located directly or as
close as possible behind your head.
Push controlto low er or rem ove
head restraint.
Folding down rear seats
1.Raise the rear seat head restraint
and rem ove.
2.Place the head restraint under
the front seat for storage.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
93
3.Pullthe seat release control.
Note: M ake sure the floor is clear ofallobjects before folding the seat.
4.Flip seat forw ard.
A ttach the safety belt w eb snap
button to the quarter trim panel
snap button.This w illensure that
safety belt does not get caught by
staying out ofthe seat back folding
path.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
94
5.To release seatback,pullthe
seatback release lever (on top of
seat) tow ard the front seat.This is
com m on for both 60% and 40%
seatbacks.
Note: W hen the seatback release
lever is pulled,slow ly low er
seatback to the flat position.
6.Rotate seatback dow n into load
floor position.
Returning the rear seats to upright position
1.Pullseatback up and into upright
position m aking sure seatback locks
into place and the red seat
unlatched indicator on release
paddle is not visible.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
95
2.Rotate seat cushion dow n into the
seating position m aking sure that
the seat cushion is locked into place
and that the safety belt buckles are
exposed.
M ake sure safety belt buckle
heads are through elastic
holders on seat backs.Safety belt
buckles m ay break ifthey are
trapped underneath the seatback
as the seatback is rotated dow n.
Before returning the seatback to its originalposition,m ake sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
A fter returning the seatback to its originalposition,pullon the
seatback to ensure that it has fully latched.A n unlatched seat m ay
becom e dangerous in the event ofa sudden stop or collision.
3.Rem ove the head restraint stored
under the front seat and return it to
the originalposition on the seat
back.
4.U nsnap the safety belt w ebbing
from the quarter trim panel.
To remove the rear cushion
1.Lift the yellow tab to release the
hinges.
2.Pullthe cushion to the outboard
side ofthe vehicle.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
96
To install the rear cushion
1.Push the cushion to the inboard
side ofthe vehicle.
2.M ake sure that the hinges are
locked into place.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System
The PersonalSafety System provides an im proved overalllevelof
frontalcrash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk ofairbag-related injuries.The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating
the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of
occupants in a variety offrontalcrash situations.
Your vehicles PersonalSafety System consists of:
D river and passenger dual-stage airbag supplem entalrestraints.
Front safety belts w ith pretensioners,energy m anagem ent retractors,
and safety belt usage sensors.
Front passenger sensing system
Passenger airbag offor pass airbag offindicator lam p
Front crash severity sensor.
Restraints ControlM odule (RCM ) w ith im pact and safing sensors.
Restraint system w arning light and back-up tone.
The electricalw iring for the airbags,crash sensor(s),safety belt
pretensioners,front safety belt usage sensors,driver seat position
sensor,front passenger sensing system ,and indicator lights.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
97
How does the Personal Safety System work?
The PersonalSafety System can adapt the deploym ent strategy ofyour
vehicles safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions.A collection ofcrash and occupant sensors provides
inform ation to the Restraints controlm odule (RCM ).D uring a crash,the
RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages ofthe dual-stage airbag supplem entalrestraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not m ean that som ething is w rong w ith
the system .Rather,it m eans the PersonalSafety System determ ined
the accident conditions (crash severity,belt usage,etc.) w ere not
appropriate to activate these safety devices.Front airbags are designed
to activate only in frontaland near-frontalcollisions (not rollovers,side
im pacts or rear im pacts) unless the collision causes sufficient
longitudinaldeceleration.The pretensioners are designed to activate in
frontal,and in side collisions and rollovers w hen the vehicle is equipped
w ith the Safety Canopy system .
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the levelofairbag
inflation energy.A low er,less forcefulenergy levelis provided for m ore
com m on,m oderate-severity im pacts.A higher energy levelis used for
the m ost severe im pacts.Refer to Ai rbag supplemental restrai nts
section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity ofan im pact.Positioned up front,it provides valuable
inform ation early in the crash event on the severity ofthe im pact.This
allow s your PersonalSafety System to distinguish betw een different
levels ofcrash severity and m odify the deploym ent strategy ofthe
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Drivers seat position sensor
The drivers seat position sensor allow s your PersonalSafety System to
tailor the deploym ent levelofthe driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position.The system is designed to help protect sm aller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a low er airbag output level.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
98
For airbags to do their job they m ust inflate w ith great force,and this force
can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close to the
airbag w hen it begins to inflate.For som e occupants,like infants in
rear-facing child seats,this occurs because they are initially sitting very
close to the airbag.For other occupants,this occurs w hen the occupant is
not properly restrained by seat belts or child safety seats and they m ove
forw ard during pre-crash braking.The m ost effective w ay to reduce the
risk ofunnecessary injuries is to m ake sure alloccupants are properly
restrained.A ccident statistics suggest that children are m uch safer w hen
properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front.
A ir bags can killor injure a child in a child seat.NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front ofan active air bag.Ifyou m ust
use a forw ard-facing child seat in the front seat,m ove the seat allthe
w ay back.
A lw ays transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and alw ays properly use appropriate child restraints.
The front passenger sensing system can autom atically turn offthe
passenger front airbag.The system is designed to help protect sm all
(child size) occupants from airbag deploym ents w hen they are
im properly seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to
proper child-seating or restraint usage recom m endations.E ven w ith this
technology,parents are STRONGLY encouraged to alw ays properly
restrain children in the rear seat.The sensor also turns offthe passenger
front airbag and passenger seat-m ounted side airbag (ifequipped) w hen
the passenger seat is em pty.
W hen the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has
turned offthe passengers frontalairbag,the pass airbag offindicator
w illlight and stay lit to rem ind you that the front passenger frontal
airbag is off.See Front passenger sensi ng system in the airbags section
ofthis chapter.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect w hether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened.This inform ation
allow s your PersonalSafety System to tailor the airbag deploym ent and
safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Refer to Safety restrai nts section in this chapter.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
99
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firm ly against the occupants body
during frontalcollisions,and in side collisions and rollovers w hen the
vehicle is equipped w ith the optionalSafety Canopy system .This
m axim izes the effectiveness ofthe safety belts.In frontalcollisions,the
safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or,ifthe collision is of
sufficient severity,together w ith the front airbags.
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy m anagem ent retractors allow
w ebbing to be pulled out ofthe retractor in a gradualand controlled
m anner in response to the occupants forw ard m om entum .This helps
reduce the risk offorce-related injuries to the occupants chest by
lim iting the load on the occupant.Refer to Energy management feature
section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational
The PersonalSafety System uses a w arning light in the instrum ent
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition ofthe system .Refer
to the Warni ng li ght section in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Routine m aintenance ofthe PersonalSafety System is not required.
The Restraints controlm odule (RCM ) m onitors its ow n internalcircuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplem entalrestraints,crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners,front safety belt buckle sensors,driver seat
position sensor,and passenger occupant classification sensor.In addition,
the RCM also m onitors the restraints w arning light in the instrum ent
cluster.A difficulty w ith the system is indicated by one or m ore ofthe
follow ing.
The w arning light w illeither flash or stay lit.
The w arning light w illnot illum inate im m ediately after ignition is
turned on.
A series offive beeps w illbe heard.The tone pattern w illrepeat
periodically untilthe problem and w arning light are repaired.
Ifany ofthese things happen,even interm ittently,have the Personal
Safety System serviced at an authorized dealer im m ediately.U nless
serviced,the system m ay not function properly in the event ofa
collision.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
100
Safety restraints precautions
A lw ays drive and ride w ith your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk ofinjury,m ake sure children sit w here they
can be properly restrained.
N ever let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap w hile the
vehicle is m oving.The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
A lloccupants ofthe vehicle,including the driver,should alw ays
properly w ear their safety belts,even w hen an airbag
supplem entalrestraint system (SRS) is provided.
It is extrem ely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or
outside ofa vehicle.In a collision,people riding in these areas
are m ore likely to be seriously injured or killed.D o not allow people to
ride in any area ofyour vehicle that is not equipped w ith seats and
safety belts.Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash,an unbelted person is significantly m ore likely
to die than a person w earing a safety belt.
E ach seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assem bly w hich is m ade up ofone buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair.1) U se the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only.N ever w ear the shoulder belt under the arm .2)
N ever sw ing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) N ever use a single belt for m ore than one person.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
101
Safety belts and seats can becom e hot in a vehicle that has been
closed up in sunny w eather;they could burn a sm allchild.Check
seat covers and buckles before you place a child anyw here near them .
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1.Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is com ing
from ) untilyou hear a snap and feel
it latch.M ake sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2.To unfasten,push the release
button and rem ove the tongue from
the buckle.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system w ith an energy m anagem ent
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce
the risk ofinjury in the event ofa head-on collision.
The front outboard safety belt system has a retractor assem bly that is
designed to extend the safety belt w ebbing in a controlled m anner.
This helps reduce the belt force acting on the users chest.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
102
A llsafety belts in the vehicle are com bination lap and shoulder belts.
The passenger safety belts have tw o types oflocking m odes described
below :
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the norm alretractor m ode,w hich allow s free shoulder belt length
adjustm ent to your m ovem ents and locking in response to vehicle
m ovem ent.For exam ple,ifthe driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply,or the vehicle receives an im pact ofapproxim ately 5 m ph (8
km /h) or m ore,the com bination safety belts w illlock to help reduce
forw ard m ovem ent ofthe driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode
When to use the automatic locking mode
In this m ode,the shoulder belt is autom atically pre-locked.The belt w ill
stillretract to rem ove any slack in the shoulder belt.The autom atic
locking m ode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This m ode should be used any time a child safety seat,except a
booster,is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions.Children
12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat
w henever possible.Refer to Safety restrai nts for chi ldren or Safety
seats for chi ldren later in this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
Buckle the com bination lap and
shoulder belt.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
103
G rasp the shoulder portion and
pulldow nw ard untilthe entire
belt is pulled out.
A llow the belt to retract.A s the belt retracts,you w illhear a clicking
sound.This indicates the safety belt is now in the autom atic locking
m ode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
D isconnect the com bination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
com pletely to disengage the autom atic locking m ode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (em ergency) locking m ode.
A fter any vehicle collision,the safety belt system s at allseating
positions (except the driver position,w hich doesnt have this
feature) m ust be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the
autom atic locking retractor feature for child seats is stillfunctioning
properly.In addition,allsafety belts should be checked for proper
function.
BE LT A N D RE TRA CTO R A SSE M BLY M U ST BE RE PLA CE D if
the safety belt assem bly autom atic locking retractorfeature or
any other safety belt function is not operating properly w hen checked
by an authorized dealer.Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor
assem bly could increase the risk ofinjury in collisions.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
104
Safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustm ents at the front outboard
seating positions.A djust the height
ofthe shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the m iddle ofyour shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
squeeze and hold the buttons on the
side and slide the height adjuster up
or dow n.Release the buttons and
pulldow n on the height adjuster to
m ake sure it is locked in place.
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the m iddle ofyour shoulder.Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt and
increase the risk ofinjury in a collision.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped w ith safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
front passenger seating positions.
The safety belt pretensioners activate during frontalcollisions,and in
side collisions and rollovers w hen the vehicle is equipped w ith the
optionalSafety Canopy system .A safety belt pretensioner is a device
w hich tightens the w ebbing ofthe lap and shoulder belts in such a w ay
that they fit m ore snugly against the body.
The driver and front passenger safety belt system (including
retractors,buckles and height adjusters) m ust be replaced ifthe
vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deploym ent offront
airbags,seat-m ounted side airbags and Safety Canopy (ifequipped),
and safety belt pretensioners.
Failure to replace the safety belt assem bly under the above
conditions could result in severe personalinjuries in the event of
a collision.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
105
Safety belt extension assembly
Ifthe safety belt is too short w hen fully extended,there is an 8 inch (20
cm ) safety belt extension assem bly that can be added (part num ber
611C22).This assem bly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost.
U se only extensions m anufactured by the sam e supplier as the safety
belt.M anufacturer identification is located at the end ofthe w ebbing on
the label.A lso,use the safety belt extension only ifthe safety belt is too
short for you w hen fully extended.
D o not use extensions to change the fit ofthe shoulder belt
across the torso.
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt system s periodically to m ake sure they w ork
properly and are not dam aged.Inspect the safety belts to m ake sure
there are no nicks,tears or cuts.Replace ifnecessary.A llsafety belt
assem blies,including retractors,buckles,front safety belt buckle
assem blies,buckle support assem blies (slide bar-ifequipped),shoulder
belt height adjusters (ifequipped),shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped),child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors,and attaching
hardw are,should be inspected after a collision.Ford M otor Com pany
recom m ends that allsafety belt assem blies in use in vehicles involved in
a collision be replaced.H ow ever,ifthe collision w as m inor and an
authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show dam age and continue
to operate properly,they do not need to be replaced.Safety belt
assem blies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced ifeither dam age or im proper operation is noted.
Failure to inspect and ifnecessary replace the safety belt
assem bly under the above conditions could result in severe
personalinjuries in the event ofa collision.
For proper care ofsoiled safety belts,refer to Interi or in the Cleani ng
chapter.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
106
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt w arning light illum inates in the instrum ent cluster and a
chim e sounds to rem ind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The drivers safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
sw itch is turned to the O N
position...
The safety belt w arning light
illum inates 1 m inute and the w arning
chim e sounds 6 seconds.
The drivers safety belt is
buckled w hile the indicator
light is illum inated and the
w arning chim e is sounding...
The safety belt w arning light and
w arning chim e turn off.
The drivers safety belt is
position...
The safety belt w arning light and
indicator chim e rem ain off.
BeltMinder
The BeltM inder feature is a supplem entalw arning to the safety belt
w arning function.This feature provides additionalrem inders by
interm ittently sounding a chim e and illum inating the safety belt w arning
lam p in the instrum ent cluster w hen the drivers and front passengers
safety belt is unbuckled.
The BeltM inder feature uses inform ation from the passenger occupant
classification sensor to determ ine ifa front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need ofa w arning.To avoid activating the
BeltM inder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
w arnings w illonly be given to large front seat occupants as determ ined
by the passenger occupant classification sensor.
Both the drivers and passengers safety belt usages are m onitored and
either m ay activate the BeltM inder feature.The w arnings are the sam e
for the driver and the front passenger.Ifthe BeltM inder w arnings have
expired (w arnings for approxim ately 5 m inutes) for one occupant (driver
or front passenger),the other occupant can stillactivate the BeltM inder
feature.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
107
If... Then...
The drivers and front
passengers safety belts are
position or less than 1-2
m inutes have elapsed since the
ignition sw itch has been turned
O N ...
The BeltM inder feature w illnot
activate.
The drivers or front
passengers safety belt is not
buckled w hen the vehicle has
reached at least 5 km /h (3
m ph) and 1-2 m inutes have
elapsed since the ignition
sw itch has been turned to
O N ...
The BeltM inder feature is activated -
the safety belt w arning light
illum inates and the w arning chim e
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds,repeating for approxim ately
5 m inutes or untilthe safety belts are
buckled.
The drivers or front
passengers safety belt becom es
unbuckled for approxim ately 1
m inute w hile the vehicle is
traveling at least 5 km /h (3
m ph) and m ore than 1-2
m inutes have elapsed since the
ignition sw itch has been turned
to O N ...
The BeltM inder feature is activated -
the safety belt w arning light
illum inates and the w arning chim e
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds,repeating for approxim ately
5 m inutes or untilthe safety belts are
buckled.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
108
The follow ing are reasons m ost often given for not w earing safety belts
(A llstatistics based on U .S.data):
Reasons given... Consider...
Crashes are rare events 36700 crashes occur every day. The
m ore w e drive,the m ore w e are
exposed to rare events,even for
good drivers.1 i n 4 of us wi ll be
seri ously i njured i n a crash duri ng
our li feti me.
Im not going far 3 of 4 fatalcrashes occur w ithin 25
m iles ofhom e.
Belts are uncom fortable Your Ford safety belts are designed to
enhance com fort.Ifyou are
uncom fortable - try different positions
for the safety belt upper anchorage
and seatback w hich should be as
upright as possible;this can im prove
com fort.
Iw as in a hurry Prime time for an accident.
BeltM inder rem inds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
Seat belts dont w ork Safety belts, w hen used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45%in cars, and by
60%in light trucks.
Traffic is light Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, m any w hen
no other vehicles are around.
Belts w rinkle m y clothes Possibly,but a serious crash can do
m uch m ore than w rinkle your clothes,
particularly ifyou are unbelted.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
109
Reasons given... Consider...
The people Im w ith dont
w ear belts
Set the exam ple,teen deaths occur 4
tim es m ore often in vehicles w ith
TW O or M O RE people.Children and
younger brothers/sisters im itate
behavior they see.
Ihave an airbag A irbags offer greater protection w hen
used w ith safety belts.Frontalairbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
Id rather be throw n clear N ot a good idea.People w ho are
ejectedare 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection,W E CA N T PICK O U R
CRA SH .
D o not sit on top ofa buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate
into the buckle to avoid the BeltM inder chim e.Buckling the
belt affects (and m ay prevent) frontaland side im pact air bag inflation
and w illincrease the risk ofinjury in an accident.To disable
(one-tim e) or deactivate the BeltM inder feature please follow the
directions stated below.
One time disable
Ifat any tim e the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles
the safety belt for that seating position,the BeltM inder is disabled for
the current ignition cycle.The BeltM inder feature w illenable during the
sam e ignition cycle ifthe occupant buckles and rem ains buckled for
approxim ately 30 seconds.Confirm ation is not given for the one tim e
disable.
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature
The driver andfront passenger BeltMinder are
deactivated/activatedindependently. When deactivating/activating
one seatingposition, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
110
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceedi ng wi th the
deacti vati on/acti vati on programmi ng procedure.
The driver and front passenger BeltM inder features can be
deactivated/activated by perform ing the follow ing procedure:
Before follow ing the procedure,m ake sure that:
The parking brake is set
The gearshift is in P (Park) (autom atic transm ission)
The gearshift is in N (N eutral) (m anualtransm ission)
The ignition sw itch is in the O FF position
The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
W hile the design allow s you to deactivate your BeltM inder,this
system is designed to im prove your chances ofbeing seat belted
and surviving an accident,and w e recom m end you leave the
BeltM inder system activated for yourselfand others w ho m ay use the
vehicle.To reduce the risk ofinjury,do not deactivate/activate the
BeltM inder feature w hile driving the vehicle.
1.Turn the ignition sw itch to the RU N (or O N ) position.(D O N O T
STA RT TH E E N G IN E )
2.W ait untilthe safety belt w arning light turns off.(A pproxim ately 1
m inute)
Step 3 m ust be com pleted w ithin 50 seconds after the safety belt
w arning light turns off.
3.For the seating position being disabled,buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt 9 tim es,ending in the unbuckled state.(Step 3 m ust be
com pleted w ithin 50 seconds after the safety belt w arning light turns
off.)
A fter Step 3,the restraint system w arning light (airbag light) w illbe
turned on for three seconds.
4.W ithin 10 seconds ofthe light turning on,buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt.
This w illdisable the BeltM inder feature for that seating position ifit
is currently enabled.A s confirm ation,the restraint system w arning
light w illflash 4 tim es per second for 3 seconds.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
111
This w illenable the BeltM inder feature for that seating position ifit
is currently disabled.A s confirm ation,the restraint system w arning
light w illflash 4 tim es per second for 3 seconds,follow ed by 3
seconds w ith the light off,then follow ed by the restraint system
w arning light flashing 4 tim es per second for 3 seconds again.
A fter receiving confirm ation,the deactivation/activation procedure is
com plete.
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to w ork w ith
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries.
A irbags D O N O T inflate slow ly;
there is a risk ofinjury from a
deploying airbag.
A lloccupants ofthe vehicle,including the driver,should alw ays
properly w ear their safety belts,even w hen an air bag
supplem entalrestraint system (SRS) is provided.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
112
The N ationalH ighw ay Traffic Safety A dm inistration (N H TSA )
recom m ends a m inim um distance ofat least 10 inches (25 cm )
betw een an occupants chest and the driver airbag m odule.
N ever place your arm over the airbag m odule as a deploying
airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
To properly position yourselfaw ay from the airbag:
M ove your seat to the rear as far as you can w hile stillreaching the
pedals com fortably.
Recline the seat slightly one or tw o degrees from the upright position.
D o not put anything on or over the airbag m odule.Placing
objects on or over the airbag inflation area m ay cause those
objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.
D o not attem pt to service,repair,or m odify the airbag
supplem entalrestraint system s or its fuses.See your authorized
dealer.
M odifications to the front end ofthe vehicle,including fram e,
bum per,front end body structure,tow hooks and B-pillar
surrounding parts m ay affect the perform ance ofthe airbag sensors
increasing the risk ofinjury.D o not m odify the front end ofthe
vehicle.
A dditionalequipm ent m ay affect the perform ance ofthe airbag
sensors increasing the risk ofinjury.Please refer to the Body
Bui lders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate
installation ofadditionalequipm ent.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
113
Children and airbags
Children m ust alw ays be properly
restrained.A ccident statistics
suggest that children are safer w hen
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position.Failure to follow
these instructions m ay increase the
risk ofinjury in a collision.
A irbags can killor injure a
child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child
seat in front ofan active airbag.If
you m ust use a forw ard-facing
child seat in the front seat,m ove
the seat allthe w ay back.
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate w hen the vehicle sustains a
longitudinaldeceleration sufficient
to cause the airbag sensors to close
an electricalcircuit that initiates
airbag inflation.The fact that the
airbags did not inflate in a collision
does not m ean that som ething is
w rong w ith the system .Rather,it
m eans the forces w ere not sufficient
enough to cause activation.Front
airbags are designed to inflate in
frontaland near-frontalcollisions,not rollover,side-im pact,or
rear-im pacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal
deceleration.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
114
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation.A fter airbag
deploym ent,it is norm alto notice a
sm oke-like,pow dery residue or
sm ellthe burnt propellant.This m ay
consist ofcornstarch,talcum
pow der or sodium com pounds w hich
m ay irritate the skin and eyes,but
none ofthe residue is toxic.
W hile the SRS is designed to help
reduce serious injuries,contact w ith
a deploying airbag m ay also cause
abrasions,sw elling or tem porary
hearing loss.Because airbags m ust
inflate rapidly and w ith considerable
force,there is the risk ofdeath or
serious injuries such as fractures,facialand eye injuries or internal
injuries,particularly to occupants w ho are not properly restrained or are
otherw ise out ofposition at the tim e ofairbag deploym ent.It is
extrem ely im portant that occupants be properly restrained as far aw ay
from the airbag m odule as possible w hile m aintaining vehicle control.
The SRS consists of:
driver and passenger airbag m odules (w hich include the inflators and
airbags).
seat-m ounted side airbags (ifequipped).Refer to Seat-mounted si de
ai rbag system later in this chapter
Safety Canopy system (ifequipped).Refer to Safety Canopy
system later in this chapter.
one or m ore im pact and safing sensors.
a readiness light and tone.
diagnostic m odule.
and the electricalw iring w hich connects the com ponents.
Front passenger sensing system .Refer to Front passenger sensi ng
system. later in this chapter.
Passenger airbag offor pass airbag offindicator lam p.Refer to
Front passenger sensi ng system later in this chapter.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
115
The RCM (restraints controlm odule) m onitors its ow n internalcircuits
and the supplem entalairbag electricalsystem w iring (including the
im pact sensors,the system w iring,the airbag system readiness light,the
airbag back up pow er and the airbag ignitors).
Severalair bag system com ponents get hot after inflation.D o not
touch them after inflation.
Ifthe airbag has deployed,the airbagwill not function again
andmust be replacedimmediately. Ifthe airbag is not
replaced,the unrepaired area w illincrease the risk ofinjury in a
collision.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to m eet the regulatory
requirem ents ofFederalM otor Vehicle Safety Standard (FM VSS) 208
and is designed to disable (w illnot inflate) the front passengers frontal
airbag under certain conditions.
The front passenger sensing system w orks w ith sensors that are part of
the front passengers seat and safety belt.The sensors are designed to
detect the presence ofa properly seated occupant and determ ine ifthe
front passengers frontalairbag should be enabled (m ay inflate) or
disabled (w illnot inflate).
The front passenger sensing system w illdisable (w illnot inflate) the
front passengers frontalairbag if:
the front passenger seat is unoccupied,or has sm all/m edium objects in
the front seat,
the system determ ines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the m anufacturers instructions,
the system determ ines that a sm allchild is present in a forw ard-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the m anufacturers
instructions,
the system determ ines that a sm allchild is present in a booster seat,
a front passenger takes his/her w eight offofthe seat for a period of
tim e,
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
116
For side airbag equipped vehicles,the front passenger sensing system
w illturn offthe passenger seat side airbag if:
the seat is em pty and safety belt is unbuckled.
The front passenger sensing system
uses a passenger airbag off or
pass airbag off indicator w hich w ill
illum inate and stay lit to rem ind you
that the front passenger frontal
airbag is off.The indicator lam p is
located in the center stack ofthe
instrum ent paneljust below the
radio.
Note:The indicator lam p w illillum inate for a short period oftim e w hen
the ignition is turned to the O N position to confirm it is functional.
W hen the front passenger seat is not occupied (em pty seat) or in the
event that the front passenger frontalairbag is enabled (m ay inflate),the
indicator lam p w illbe unlit.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (w illnot
inflate) the front passengers frontalairbag w hen a rear facing infant
seat,a forw ard-facing child restraint,or a booster seat is detected.
W hen the front passenger sensing system disables (w illnot inflate)
the front passenger frontalairbag,the indicator lam p w illillum inate
and stay lit to rem ind you that the front passenger frontalairbag is
disabled.
Ifthe child restraint has been installed and the indicator lam p is not
lit,then turn the vehicle off,rem ove the child restraint from the
vehicle and reinstallthe restraint follow ing the child restraint
m anufacturers instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (m ay inflate)
the front passengers frontalairbag anytim e the system senses that a
person ofadult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
W hen the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontalairbag (m ay inflate),the indicator w illbe unlit and stay unlit.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
117
Ifa person ofadult size is sitting in the front passengers seat,but the
passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lam p is lit,it is
possible that the person isnt sitting properly in the seat.Ifthis happens:
Turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback in the
fullupright position.
H ave the person sit upright in the seat,centered on the seat cushion,
w ith the persons legs com fortably extended.
Restart the vehicle and have the person rem ain in this position for
about tw o m inutes.This w illallow the system to detect that person
and enable the passengers frontalairbag.
Ifthe indicator lam p rem ains lit even after this,the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Occupant
Pass AirbagOff
Indicator Lamp
Passenger Airbag
E m pty seat U nlit D isabled
Sm allchild in child
safety seat or booster
Lit D isabled
Sm allchild w ith safety
belt buckled or
unbuckled
Lit D isabled
A dult U nlit E nabled
E ven w ith A dvanced Restraints System s,children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the back seat.
A fter alloccupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts,its
very im portant that they continue to sit properly.A properly seated
occupant sits upright,leaning against the seat back,and centered on the
seat cushion,w ith their feet com fortably extended on the floor.Sitting
im properly can increase the chance ofinjury in a crash event.For
exam ple,ifan occupant slouches,lies dow n,turns sidew ays,sits forw ard,
leans forw ard or sidew ays,or puts one or both feet up,the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Sitting im properly out ofposition or w ith the seat back reclined
too far can take offw eight from the seat cushion and affect the
decision ofthe front passenger sensing system ,resulting in serious
injury or death in a crash.
A lw ays sit upright against your seatback,w ith your feet on the floor.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
118
The front passenger sensing system m ay detect sm allor m edium objects
placed on the seat cushion.For m ost objects that are in the front
passenger seat,the passenger airbag w illbe disabled.E ven though the
passenger airbag is disabled,the pass airbag off lam p m ay or m ay not
be illum inated according to the table below.
Objects
Pass AirbagOff
Indicator Lamp
Passenger Airbag
Sm all(i.e.3 ring
binder,sm allpurse,
bottled w ater)
U nlit D isabled
M edium (i.e.heavy
briefcase,fully packed
luggage)
Lit D isabled
E m pty seat,Sm allor
m edium object w ith
safety belt buckled
Lit D isabled
Ifyou think that the status ofthe passenger airbag offindicator lam p is
incorrect,check for the follow ing:
O bjects lodged underneath the seat
O bjects betw een the seat cushion and the center console (if
equipped)
O bjects hanging offthe seat back
O bjects stow ed in the seatback m ap pocket (ifequipped)
O bjects placed on the occupants lap
Cargo interference w ith the seat
O ther passengers pushing or pulling on the seat
Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat
The conditions listed above m ay cause the w eight ofa properly seated
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing
system .The person in the front passenger seat m ay appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions described in the list above.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
119
To reduce the risk ofpossible serious injury:
D o not stow objects in seat back m ap pocket (ifequipped) or
hang objects offseat back ifa child is in the front passenger seat.
D o not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or betw een
the seat and the center console (ifequipped).
Check the passenger airbag offor pass airbag offindicator lam p for
proper airbag Status.
Failure to follow these instructions m ay interfere w ith the front
passenger seat sensing system .
In case there is a problem w ith the
front passenger sensing system ,the
airbag readiness lam p in the
instrum ent cluster w illstay lit.
If the airbagreadiness lampis lit, do the following:
The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects that
m ay be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering
w ith the seat.
Ifobjects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering w ith the seat;please take
the follow ing steps to rem ove the obstruction:
Pullthe vehicle over.
Turn the vehicle off.
D river and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering w ith the seat.
Rem ove the obstruction(s) (iffound).
Restart the vehicle.
W ait at least 2 m inutes and verify that the airbag readiness lam p is no
longer illum inated
Ifthe airbag readiness lam p rem ains illum inated,this m ay or m ay/not
be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system .
D O N O T attem pt to repair or service the system ;take your vehicle
im m ediately to an authorized dealer.
Ifit is necessary to m odify an advanced front airbag system to
accom m odate a person w ith disabilities,contact the Ford Custom er
Relationship Center at the phone num ber show n in the Customer
Assi stance chapter ofthis Owners Gui de.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
120
A ny alteration/m odification to the front passenger seat m ay
affect the perform ance ofthe front passenger sensing system .
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrum ent cluster or a tone to
indicate the status ofthe system .Refer to Ai rbag readi ness section in
the Instrument Cluster chapter.Routine m aintenance ofthe airbag is
not required.
A difficulty w ith the system is indicated by one or m ore ofthe follow ing:
The readiness light w illeither
flash or stay lit.
The readiness light w illnot
illum inate im m ediately after
ignition is turned on.
periodically untilthe problem and/or light are repaired.
Ifany ofthese things happen,even interm ittently,have the SRS serviced
at an authorized dealer im m ediately.U nless serviced,the system m ay not
function properly in the event ofa collision.
Seat-mounted side airbag system (if equipped)
D o not place objects or m ount equipm ent on or near the airbag
cover on the side ofthe seatbacks ofthe front seats or in front
seat areas that m ay com e into contact w ith a deploying airbag.Failure
to follow these instructions m ay increase the risk ofpersonalinjury in
the event ofa collision.
D o not use accessory seat covers.The use ofaccessory seat
covers m ay prevent the deploym ent ofthe side airbags and
increase the risk ofinjury in an accident.
D o not lean your head on the door.The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side ofthe seatback.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
121
D o not attem pt to service,repair,or m odify the airbag SRS,its
fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag.See an
authorized dealer.
A lloccupants ofthe vehicle should alw ays w ear their safety belts
even w hen an airbag SRS is provided.
How does the side airbag system work?
The design and developm ent ofthe
side airbag system included
recom m ended testing procedures
that w ere developed by a group of
autom otive safety experts know n as
the Side A irbag TechnicalW orking
G roup.These recom m ended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deploym ent of
side airbags.
The side airbag system consists of
the follow ing:
A n inflatable nylon bag (airbag)
w ith a gas generator concealed
behind the outboard bolster of
the driver and front passenger
seatbacks.
A specialseat cover designed to allow airbag deploym ent.
The sam e w arning light,electronic controland diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
Tw o crash sensors located on the low er portion ofthe b-pillar (one on
each side ofthe vehicle).
Side airbags,in com bination w ith safety belts,can help reduce the risk of
severe injuries in the event ofa significant side im pact collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side ofthe seatbacks ofthe
front seats.In certain lateralcollisions,the airbag on the side affected by
the collision w illbe inflated.Ifthe front passenger sensing system
detects an em pty seat,the front passenger seat-m ounted side airbag w ill
be deactivated.The airbag w as designed to inflate betw een the door
paneland occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side im pact collisions.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
122
The airbag SRS is designed to activate w hen the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electricalcircuit
that initiates airbag inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not m ean that
som ething is w rong w ith the system .Rather,it m eans the forces w ere
not ofthe type sufficient to cause activation.Side airbags are designed
to inflate in side-im pact collisions,not roll-over,rear-im pact,frontalor
near-frontalcollisions,unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
Severalairbag system com ponents get hot after inflation.D o not
touch them after inflation.
Ifthe side airbag has
deployed,the airbagwill
not function again. The side
airbagsystem(includingthe
seat) must be inspectedand
servicedby an authorized
dealer. Ifthe airbag is not
replaced,the unrepaired area w ill
increase the risk ofinjury in a
collision.
indicate the condition ofthe system .Refer to the Ai rbag readi ness
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter.Routine m aintenance ofthe
side airbag is not required.
The readiness light (sam e light as for front airbag system ) w illeither
flash or stay lit.
The readiness light w illnot illum inate im m ediately after ignition is
turned on.
at your authorized dealer im m ediately.U nless serviced,the system m ay
not function properly in the event ofa collision.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
123
Safety Canopy system (if equipped)
D o not place objects or
m ount equipm ent on or
near the headliner at the siderail
that m ay com e into contact w ith a
deploying Safety Canopy.Failure
to follow these instructions m ay
increase the risk ofpersonalinjury
in the event ofa collision.
D o not lean your head on the door.The Safety Canopy could
injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
D o not attem pt to service,repair,or m odify the Safety Canopy
system ,its fuses,the A ,B,or C pillar trim ,or the headliner on a
vehicle containing a Safety Canopy.See your authorized dealer.
A lloccupants ofthe vehicle including the driver should alw ays
w ear their safety belts even w hen an airbag SRS and Safety
Canopy system is provided.
To reduce risk ofinjury,do not obstruct or place objects in the
deploym ent path ofthe inflatable Safety Canopy.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
124
How does the Safety Canopy system work?
The design and developm ent ofthe
Safety Canopy system included
recom m ended testing procedures
that w ere developed by a group of
autom otive safety experts know n as
the Side A irbag TechnicalW orking
G roup.These recom m ended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deploym ent of
side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy).
The Safety Canopy system
consists ofthe follow ing:
A n inflatable nylon curtain w ith a
gas generator concealed behind
the headliner and above the doors
(one on each side ofvehicle).
A headliner designed to flex open
above the side doors to allow Safety Canopy deploym ent.
The sam e w arning light,electronic controland diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
Tw o crash sensors m ounted at low er B-Pillar (one on each side).
Tw o crash sensors located at the c-pillar behind the rear doors (one
on each side).
Rollover sensor in the restraints controlm odule (RCM ).
The Safety Canopy system ,in com bination w ith safety belts,can help
reduce the risk ofsevere injuries in the event ofa significant side im pact
collision or rollover event.
Children 12 years old and under should alw ays be properly restrained in
the second or third row seats.The Safety Canopy w illnot interfere
w ith children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate dow nw ard from the headliner above the
doors along the side w indow opening.
The Safety Canopy system is designed to active w hen the vehicle
sustains lateraldeceleration sufficient to cause the RCM to initiate Safety
Canopy inflation or w hen a certain likelihood ofa rollover event is
detected by the rollover sensor.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
125
The Safety Canopy is m ounted to roofside-railsheet m etal,behind the
headliner,above the first and second row seats.The Safety Canopy is
designed to inflate betw een the side w indow area and occupants to
further enhance protection provided in side im pact collisions and rollover
events.
The fact that the Safety Canopy did not activate in a collision does not
m ean that som ething is w rong w ith the system .Rather,it m eans the
forces w ere not ofthe type sufficient to cause activation.The Safety
Canopy is designed to inflate in certain side im pact collisions or
rollover events,not in rear im pact,frontalor near-frontalcollisions,
unless the collision causes sufficient lateraldeceleration or rollover
likelihood.
SeveralSafety Canopy
system com ponents get hot
after inflation.D o not touch them
after inflation.
Ifthe Safety Canopy system has deployed,the Safety
Canopy will not function again unless replaced. The
Safety Canopy system(includingthe A, B andC pillar trim)
must be inspectedandservicedby a authorizeddealer. Ifthe
Safety Canopy is not replaced,the unrepaired area w illincrease the
risk ofinjury in a collision.
indicate the condition ofthe system .Refer to the Ai rbag readi ness
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter.Routine m aintenance ofthe
side airbag is not required.
The readiness light (sam e light as for front airbag system ) w illeither
flash or stay lit.
The readiness light w illnot illum inate im m ediately after ignition is
turned on.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
126
at your authorized dealer im m ediately.U nless serviced,the system m ay
not function properly in the event ofa collision.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles (including
pretensioners)
See your authorized dealer.A irbags M U ST BE disposed ofby qualified
personnel.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the follow ing sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children.A lso see Ai rbag supplemental restrai nt system
(SRS) in this chapter for specialinstructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U .S.
and Canada.Ifsm allchildren (generally children w ho are four years old
or younger and w ho w eigh 40 lb.[18 kg]or less) ride in your vehicle,you
m ust put them in safety seats m ade especially for children.M any states
require that children use approved booster seats untilthey are eight
years old.Check your localand state or provinciallaw s for specific
requirem ents regarding the safety ofchildren in your vehicle.W hen
possible,alw ays place children under age 12 in the rear seat ofyour
vehicle.A ccident statistics suggest that children are safer w hen properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
N ever let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap w hile the
vehicle is m oving.The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
A lw ays follow the instructions and w arnings that com e w ith any infant or
child restraint you m ight use.
Children and safety belts
Ifthe child is the proper size,restrain the child in a safety seat.Children
w ho are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety
seat m anufacturer) should alw ays w ear safety belts.
Follow allthe im portant safety restraint and airbag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
127
Ifthe shoulder belt portion ofa com bination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front ofthe childs face or
neck,the child should w ear the lap and shoulder belt.M oving the child
closer to the center ofthe vehicle m ay help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
D o not leave children,unreliable adults,or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typicalconvertible or toddler seat w hen they w eigh
40 lb.(18 kg) and are around 4 years ofage.A lthough the lap/shoulder
belt w illprovide som e protection,these children are stilltoo sm allfor
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly,w hich could increase the risk ofserious
injury in a crash.
To im prove the fit ofboth the lap and shoulder belt on children w ho
have outgrow n child safety seats,Ford M otor Com pany recom m ends use
ofa belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better.They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend com fortably.Booster seats m ay also m ake the shoulder belt fit
better and m ore com fortably.Try to keep the belt near the m iddle ofthe
shoulder.
When children shoulduse booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the tim e they outgrow the
toddler seat untilthey are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly.G enerally this is w hen they w eigh about
80 lb.(36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).
Booster seats should be used untilyou can answ er YE S to A LL ofthese
questions:
Can the child sit allthe w ay back
against the vehicle seat back w ith
knees bent com fortably at the
edge ofthe seat w ithout
slouching?
D oes the lap belt rest low across the hips?
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
128
Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
Can the child stay seated like this for the w hole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are tw o types ofbelt-positioning booster seats:
Those that are backless.
Ifyour backless booster seat has a
rem ovable shield,rem ove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt.Ifa seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint,a backless booster seat
m ay place your childs head (top
ofear level) above the top ofthe
seat.In this case,m ove the
backless booster to another
seating position w ith a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
Those w ith a high back.
If,w ith a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
childs head,a high back booster
seat w ould be a better choice.
E ither type can be used at any seating position equipped w ith
lap/shoulder belts ifyour child is over 40 lb.(18 kg).
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
129
Children and booster seats vary w idely in size and shape.Choose a
booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips,never up
across the stom ach,and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the
chest and rest snugly near the center ofthe shoulder.The draw ings
below com pare the idealfit (center) to a shoulder belt uncom fortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip offthe shoulder.
Ifthe booster seat slides on the vehicle seat,placing a rubberized m esh
sold as shelfor carpet liner under the booster seat m ay im prove this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
U sing a booster w ithout a shoulder belt increases the risk ofa childs
head hitting a hard surface in a collision.For this reason,you should
never use a booster seat w ith a lap belt only.It is best to use a booster
seat w ith lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children
to ride.
M ove a child to a different seating location ifthe shoulder belt
does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Follow allinstructions provided by the m anufacturer ofthe
booster seat.
N ever put the shoulder belt under a childs arm or behind the
back because it elim inates the protection for the upper part of
the body and m ay increase the risk ofinjury or death in a collision.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
130
N ever use pillow s,books,or tow els to boost a child.They can
slide around and increase the likelihood ofinjury or death in a
collision.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
U se a safety seat that is recom m ended for the size and w eight ofthe
child.Carefully follow allofthe m anufacturers instructions w ith the
safety seat you put in your vehicle.Ifyou do not installand use the
safety seat properly,the child m ay be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
W hen installing a child safety seat:
Review and follow the inform ation
presented in the ai rbag
supplemental restrai nt system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
U se the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position (the
buckle closest to the direction the
tongue is com ing from ).
Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle untilyou hear a
snap and feelit latch.M ake sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
K eep the buckle release button pointing up and aw ay from the safety
seat,w ith the tongue betw een the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidentalunbuckling.
Place seat back in upright position.
Put the safety belt in the autom atic locking m ode.Refer to Automati c
locki ng mode (passenger si de front and outboard rear seati ng
posi ti ons) (i f equi pped) section in this chapter.
LATCH low er anchors are recom m ended for use by children up to 48
lb.(22 kg) in a child restraint.Top tether anchors can be used for
children up to 60 lb.(27 kg) in a child restraint,and to provide upper
torso restraint for children up to 80 lb.(36 kg) using an upper torso
harness and a belt-positioning booster.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
131
Ford recom m ends the use ofa child safety seat having a top tether
strap.Installthe child safety seat in a seating position w ith LATCH and
tether anchors.For m ore inform ation on top tether straps and anchors,
refer to Attachi ng safety seats wi th tether straps in this chapter.For
m ore inform ation ofLATCH anchors refer to Attachi ng safety seats wi th
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chi ldren) attachments in this
chapter.
Carefully follow allofthe m anufacturers instructions included
w ith the safety seat you put in your vehicle.Ifyou do not install
and use the safety seat properly,the child m ay be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed
in front ofan active passenger airbag.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts
The rear seat headrestraints must be removedwhen usinga child
seat.
A irbags can killor injure a child in a child seat.NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front ofan active air bag.Ifyou m ust
use a forw ard-facing child seat in the front seat,m ove the seat allthe
w ay back.
1.Position the child safety seat in a
seat w ith a com bination lap and
shoulder belt.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear
seat w henever possible.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
132
2.Pulldow n on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3.W hile holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together,route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
m anufacturers instructions.Be sure
the belt w ebbing is not tw isted.
4.Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is com ing
from ) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feelthe latch
engage.M ake sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
133
5.To put the retractor in the
autom atic locking m ode,grasp the
shoulder portion ofthe belt and pull
dow nw ard untilallofthe belt is
extracted and a click is heard.
6.A llow the belt to retract.The belt w illclick as it retracts to indicate it
is in the autom atic locking m ode.
7.Pullthe lap belt portion across
the child seat tow ard the buckle and
pullup on the shoulder belt w hile
pushing dow n w ith your knee on the
child seat.
8.A llow the safety belt to retract to
rem ove any slack in the belt.
9.Before placing the child in the
seat,forcibly tilt the seat forw ard
and back to m ake sure the seat is
securely held in place.To check
this,grab the seat at the belt path
and attem pt to m ove it side to side
and forw ard and back.There should
be no m ore than one inch of
m ovem ent for proper installation.
10.Try to pullthe belt out ofthe retractor to m ake sure the retractor is
in the autom atic locking m ode (you should not be able to pullm ore belt
out).Ifthe retractor is not locked,unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 2
through 9.
Check to m ake sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
134
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
M ost new forw ard-facing child safety seats include a tether strap w hich
goes over the back ofthe seat and hooks to an anchoring point.Tether
straps are available as an accessory for m any older safety seats.Contact
the m anufacturer ofyour child seat for inform ation about ordering a
tether strap.
The rear seating positions ofyour vehicle are equipped w ith built-in
tether strap anchors located behind the seats on the roofpanelin the
cargo area.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the follow ing positions:
A ttach the tether strap only
to the appropriate tether
anchor as show n.The tether strap
m ay not w ork properly ifattached
som ew here other than the correct
tether anchor.
1.Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.
2.Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back ofthe seat.
For vehicles w ith adjustable head restraints,rem ove the head restraint
first,place under the front seat for storage,and then route the tether
strap over the top ofthe seatback.
3.Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
There are three tether anchors
located on the headliner at the rear
ofthe vehicle.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
135
4.Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as show n.
The arrow in the above graphic
points tow ard the front ofthe
vehicle.
Ifthe tether strap is clipped
incorrectly,the child safety
seat m ay not be retained properly
in the event ofa collision.
5.Installthe child safety seat tightly
using the LATCH anchors or safety
belts.Follow the instructions in this chapter.
6.Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
m anufacturers instructions.
Ifthe safety seat is not anchored properly,the risk ofa child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) attachments for child seat anchors
Som e child safety seats have tw o rigid or w ebbing m ounted attachm ents
that connect to tw o anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.
This type ofchild seat elim inates the need to use safety belts to attach
the child seat.For forw ard-facing child seats,the tether strap m ust also
be attached to the proper tether anchor.See Attachi ng safety seats wi th
tether straps in this chapter.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
136
Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the
follow ing locations:
The anchors on both sides ofthe
center ofthe rear seat are provided
prim arily for child seats at the
outboard seats,and are further
apart than the pairs oflow er
anchors for child seat installation at
other seats.A child seat w ith rigid
LATCH attachm ents cannot be
installed at the center rear seat.A
child seat w ith LATCH attachm ents on belt w ebbing can be used at the
center rear seat unless a child seat at an outboard rear seat is attached
to one ofthese low er anchors.Installa child seat onto the low er anchors
at the center rear seat O N LY IF the child restraint m anufacturer
recom m ends that the child seat can be installed to anchors that are
spaced up to 20 in (500 m m ) apart.
N ever attach tw o LATCH child safety seats to the sam e anchor.
In a crash,one anchor m ay not be strong enough to hold tw o
child safety seat attachm ents and m ay break,causing serious injury or
death.
The low er anchors for child seat
installation are located at the rear
section ofthe second row seat
betw een the cushion and seat back.
Follow the child seat m anufacturers instructions to properly installa
child seat w ith LATCH attachm ents.
A ttach LATCH low er attachm ents ofthe child seat only to the
anchors show n.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
137
Ifyou installa child seat w ith rigid LATCH attachm ents,do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat offthe vehicle seat cushion
w hen the child is seated in it.K eep the tether strap just snug w ithout
lifting the front ofthe child seat.K eeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
E ach tim e you use the safety seat,check that the seat is properly
attached to the low er anchors and tether anchor.Try to tilt the child
seat from side to side.A lso try to tug the seat forw ard.Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
Ifthe safety seat is not anchored properly,the risk ofa child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
138
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
U tility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highw ays and off-road.U tility
vehicles and trucks are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any m ore than
low -slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.
other types ofvehicles.To reduce the risk ofserious injury or
death from a rollover or other crash you m ust:
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt m aneuvers;
D rive at safe speeds for the conditions;
K eep tires properly inflated;
N ever overload or im properly load your vehicle;and
M ake sure every passenger is properly restrained.
to die than a person w earing a seat belt.A lloccupants m ust
w ear safety belts and children/infants m ust use appropriate restraints
to m inim ize the risk ofinjury or ejection.
Study your Owners Gui de and any supplem ents for specific inform ation
about equipm ent features,instructions for safe driving and additional
precautions to reduce the risk ofan accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
4WD and AWD Systems (if equipped)
A vehicle equipped w ith AW D or 4W D has the ability to use allfour
w heels to pow er itself.This increases traction w hich m ay enable you to
safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional
tw o-w heeldrive vehicle cannot.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
139
Pow er is supplied to allfour w heels
through a transfer case or pow er
transfer unit.Inform ation on
transfer case operation and shifting
procedures can be found in the
Dri vi ng chapter.Inform ation on
transfer case m aintenance can be
found in the Mai ntenance and
Speci fi cati on chapter.You should becom e thoroughly fam iliar w ith this
inform ation before you operate your vehicle.
O n som e 4W D m odels,the initialshift from tw o-w heeldrive to 4W D
w hile the vehicle is m oving can cause a m om entary clunk and ratcheting
sound.These sounds are norm alas the front drivetrain com es up to
speed and is not cause for concern.
D o not becom e overconfident in the ability of4W D and AW D
vehicles.A lthough a 4W D or AW D vehicle m ay accelerate better
than tw o-w heeldrive vehicle in low traction situations,it w ont stop
any faster than tw o-w heeldrive vehicles.A lw ays drive at a safe speed.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
SU V and trucks can differ from
som e other vehicles in a few
noticeable w ays.Your vehicle m ay
be:
H igher to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travelover rough terrain
w ithout getting hung up or
dam aging underbody com ponents.
Shorter to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest ofa hillw ithout
getting hung up or dam aging
underbody com ponents.A llother
things held equal,a shorter
w heelbase m ay m ake your vehicle quicker to respond to steering
inputs than a vehicle w ith a longer w heelbase.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
140
N arrow er to provide greater
m aneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
A s a result ofthe above dim ensional
differences,SU Vs and trucks often
w illhave a higher center ofgravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity betw een the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that m ake your
vehicle so versatile also m ake it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
N ew vehicles are fitted w ith tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Q uality G rades.The Q uality
grades can be found w here
applicable on the tire sidew all
betw een tread shoulder and
m axim um section w idth.For
exam ple:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Q uality G rades are determ ined by standards that the U nited
States D epartm ent ofTransportation has set.
Tire Q uality G rades apply to new pneum atic tires for use on passenger
cars.They do not apply to deep tread,w inter-type snow tires,
space-saver or tem porary use spare tires,tires w ith nom inalrim
diam eters of10 to 12 inches or lim ited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code ofFederalRegulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U .S.
D epartm ent ofTransportation requires Ford M otor Com pany to give you
the follow ing inform ation about tire grades exactly as the governm ent
has w ritten it.
Treadwear
The treadw ear grade is a com parative rating based on the w ear rate of
the tire w hen tested under controlled conditions on a specified
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
141
governm ent test course.For exam ple,a tire graded 150 w ould w ear one
and one-half(1 1/2) tim es as w ellon the governm ent course as a tire
graded 100.The relative perform ance oftires depends upon the actual
conditions oftheir use,how ever,and m ay depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits,service practices,and
differences in road characteristics and clim ate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades,from highest to low est are A A ,A ,B,and C.The grades
represent the tires ability to stop on w et pavem ent as m easured under
controlled conditions on specified governm ent test surfaces ofasphalt and
concrete.A tire m arked C m ay have poor traction perform ance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include
acceleration,cornering,hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The tem perature grades are A (the highest),B and C,representing the tires
resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heat w hen
tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
w heel.Sustained high tem perature can cause the m aterialofthe tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life,and excessive tem perature can lead to
sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a levelofperform ance w hich
allpassenger car tires m ust m eet under the FederalM otor Vehicle Safety
Standard N o.109.G rades B and A represent higher levels ofperform ance on
the laboratory test w heelthan the m inim um required by law.
The tem perature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded.E xcessive speed,
underinflation,or excessive loading,either separately or in
com bination,can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give m any thousands ofm iles ofservice,but they
m ust be m aintained in order to get the m axim um benefit from them .
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire label: A labelshow ing the O E (O riginalE quipm ent) tire sizes,
recom m ended inflation pressure and the m axim um w eight the vehicle
can carry.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
142
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num ber on the sidew allof
each tire providing inform ation about the tire brand and
m anufacturing plant,tire size and date ofm anufacture.A lso referred
to as D O T code.
Inflation pressure: A m easure ofthe am ount ofair in a tire.
Standardload: A class ofP-m etric or M etric tires designed to carry a
m axim um load at 35 psi[37 psi(2.5 bar) for M etric tires].Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure w illnot increase the tires
load carrying capability.
Extra load: A class ofP-m etric or M etric tires designed to carry a
heavier m axim um load at 41 psi[43 psi(2.9 bar) for M etric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure w illnot increase
the tires load carrying capability.
kPa: K ilopascal,a m etric unit ofair pressure.
PSI: Pounds per square inch,a standard unit ofair pressure.
Coldinflation pressure: The tire pressure w hen the vehicle has
been stationary and out ofdirect sunlight for an hour or m ore and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 m ile (1.6 km ).
Recommendedinflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Com pliance Certification Labelor Tire Labellocated on
the B-Pillar or the edge ofthe drivers door.
B-pillar: The structuralm em ber at the side ofthe vehicle behind the
front door.
Beadarea of the tire: A rea ofthe tire next to the rim .
Sidewall of the tire: A rea betw een the bead area and the tread.
Treadarea of the tire: A rea ofthe perim eter ofthe tire that
contacts the road w hen m ounted on the vehicle.
Rim: The m etalsupport (w heel) for a tire or a tire and tube assem bly
upon w hich the tire beads are seated.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation ofyour vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated.Rem em ber that a tire can lose up to halfofits air pressure
w ithout appearing flat.
E very day before you drive,check your tires.Ifone looks low er than the
others,use a tire gauge to check pressure ofalltires and adjust if
required.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
143
A t least once a m onth and before long trips,inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure w ith a tire gauge (including spare,ifequipped).Inflate
alltires to the inflation pressure recom m ended by Ford M otor Com pany.
U se a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure,including the spare
(ifequipped),at least m onthly and before long trips.You are strongly
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge,as autom atic service station
gauges m ay be inaccurate.Ford recom m ends the use ofa digitalor
dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge.
U se the recom m ended cold inflation pressure for optim um tire
perform ance and w ear.U nder-inflation or over-inflation m ay cause
uneven treadw ear patterns.
U nder-inflation is the m ost com m on cause oftire failures and
m ay result in severe tire cracking,tread separation or blow out,
w ith unexpected loss ofvehicle controland increased risk ofinjury.
U nder-inflation increases sidew allflexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internaldam age to the tire.It also m ay
result in unnecessary tire stress,irregular w ear,loss ofvehicle control
and accidents.A tire can lose up to halfofits air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
A lw ays inflate your tires to the Ford recom m ended inflation pressure
even ifit is less than the m axim um inflation pressure inform ation found
on the tire.The Ford recom m ended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Com pliance Certification Labelor Tire Labelw hich is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge ofthe drivers door.Failure to follow the tire
pressure recom m endations can cause uneven treadw ear patterns and
adversely affect the w ay your vehicle handles.
MaximumPermissible Inflation Pressure is the tire m anufacturers
m axim um perm issible pressure and/or the pressure at w hich the m axim um
load can be carried by the tire.This pressure is norm ally higher than the
m anufacturers recom m ended cold inflation pressure w hich can be found
on the Safety Com pliance Certification Labelor Tire Labelw hich is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge ofthe drivers door.The cold inflation pressure
should never be set low er than the recom m ended pressure on the Safety
Com pliance Certification Labelor Tire Label.
W hen w eather tem perature changes occur,tire inflation pressures also
change.A 10 F (6 C) tem perature drop can cause a corresponding
drop of1 psi(7 kPa) in inflation pressure.Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure w hich can be found
on the Safety Com pliance Certification Labelor Tire Label.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
144
Ifyou are checking tire pressure w hen the tire is hot,(i.e.driven m ore
than 1 m ile [1.6 km ]),never bleedor reduce air pressure.The tires are
hot from driving and it is norm alfor pressures to increase above
recom m ended cold pressures.A hot tire at or below recom m ended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1.M ake sure the tires are cool,m eaning they are not hot from driving
even a m ile.
Note: Ifyou have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s),check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
w hen you get to the pum p.It is norm alfor tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.N ever bleedor reduce air
pressure w hen tires are hot.
2.Rem ove the cap from the valve on one tire,then firm ly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and m easure the pressure.
3.A dd enough air to reach the recom m ended air pressure
Note: Ifyou overfillthe tire,release air by pushing on the m etalstem in
the center ofthe valve.Then recheck the pressure w ith your tire gauge.
4.Replace the valve cap.
5.Repeat this procedure for each tire,including the spare.
Note: Som e spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires.For T-type/m ini-spare tires (see T-Type/Mi ni -Spare Ti re
Informati on section for description):Store and m aintain at 60psi(4.15
bars).For FullSize and D issim ilar spare tires (see Di ssi mi lar Spare
Ti re/Wheel Informati on section for description):Store and m aintain at
the higher ofthe front and rear inflation pressure as show n on the Tire
Label.
6.Visually inspect the tires to m ake sure there are no nails or other
objects em bedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7.Check the sidew alls to m ake sure there are no gouges,cuts or bulges.
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive w ear and
rem ove objects such as stones,nails or glass that m ay be w edged in the
tread grooves.Check for holes or cuts that m ay perm it air leakage from
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
145
the tire and m ake necessary repairs.A lso inspect the tire sidew alls for
cracking,cuts,bruises and other signs ofdam age or excessive w ear.If
internaldam age to the tire is suspected,have the tire dem ounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced.For your safety,
tires that are dam aged or show signs ofexcessive w ear should not be
used because they are m ore likely to blow out or fail.
Im proper or inadequate vehicle m aintenance can cause tires to w ear
abnorm ally.Inspect allyour tires,including the spare,frequently,and
replace them ifone or m ore ofthe follow ing conditions exist:
Tire wear
W hen the tread is w orn dow n to
1/16th ofan inch (2 m m ),tires m ust
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning.Built-in treadw ear
indicators,or w ear bars,w hich
look like narrow strips ofsm ooth
rubber across the tread w illappear
on the tire w hen the tread is w orn
dow n to 1/16th ofan inch (2 m m ).
W hen the tire tread w ears dow n to
the sam e height as these w ear bars,the tire is w orn out and m ust be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidew alls for dam age (such as
bulges in the tread or sidew alls,cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidew all).Ifdam age is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional.Tires can be dam aged
during off-road use,so inspection after off-road use is also
recom m ended.
Age
Tires degrade over tim e,even w hen they are not being used.It is
recom m ended that tires generally be replaced after 6 years ofnorm al
service.H eat caused by hot clim ates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process.
You should replace the spare tire w hen you replace the other road tires
due to the aging ofthe spare tire.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
146
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U .S.and Canada Federalregulations require tire m anufacturers to
place standardized inform ation on the sidew allofalltires.This
inform ation identifies and describes the fundam entalcharacteristics of
the tire and also provides a U .S.D O T Tire Identification N um ber for
safety standard certification and in case ofa recall.
This begins w ith the letters D O Tand indicates that the tire m eets all
federalstandards.The next tw o num bers or letters are the plant code
designating w here it w as m anufactured,the next tw o are the tire size
code and the last four num bers represent the w eek and year the tire w as
built.For exam ple,the num bers 317 m ean the 31st w eek of1997.A fter
2000 the num bers go to four digits.For exam ple,2501 m eans the 25th
w eek of2001.The num bers in betw een are identification codes used for
traceability.This inform ation is used to contact custom ers ifa tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped w ith tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
O nly use replacem ent tires and w heels that are the sam e size
and type (such as P-m etric versus LT-m etric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford.U se ofany tire or
w heelnot recom m ended by Ford can affect the safety and
perform ance ofyour vehicle,w hich could result in an increased risk of
loss ofvehicle control,vehicle rollover,personalinjury and death.
A dditionally the use ofnon-recom m ended tires and w heels could cause
steering,suspension,axle or transfer case/pow er transfer unit failure.If
you have questions regarding tire replacem ent,see an authorized
dealer.
Important: Rem em ber to replace the w heelvalve stem s w hen the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recom m ended that the tw o front tires or tw o rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors m ounted in the w heels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in afterm arket w heels.
The installation ofreplacem ent tires w ith steelcord body plies in the tire
sidew allm ay cause m alfunction ofthe Tire Pressure M onitoring System
(TPM S),and is not recom m ended (cord m aterialinform ation is m olded
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
147
on the tire sidew all).A dditionally,ifyour vehicle w as originally equipped
w ith run-flat tires,replacing them w ith tires that are not identicalto
those originally fitted m ay cause m alfunction ofthe TPM S,and is not
recom m ended.Run-flat tires should not be used to replace regular tires.
A lw ays check your TPM S indicator im m ediately after replacing one or
m ore tires on your vehicle.Ifthe TPM S indicator is flashing,your TPM S
is m alfunctioning.Your replacem ent tire m ight be incom patible w ith your
TPM S,or som e com ponent ofthe TPM S m ay be dam aged.
Safety practices
D riving habits have a great dealto do w ith your tire m ileage and safety.
O bserve posted speed lim its
Avoid fast starts,stops and turns
Avoid potholes and objects on the road
D o not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb w hen parking
Ifyour vehicle is stuck in snow,m ud,sand,etc.,do not rapidly
spin the tires;spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an
explosion.A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
N ever spin the tires in excess ofthe 35 m ph (55 km /h) point
indicated on the speedom eter.
Highway hazards
N o m atter how carefully you drive theres alw ays the possibility that you
m ay eventually have a flat tire on the highw ay.D rive slow ly to the
closest safe area out oftraffic.This m ay further dam age the flat tire,but
your safety is m ore im portant.
Ifyou feela sudden vibration or ride disturbance w hile driving,or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been dam aged,im m ediately reduce your
speed.D rive w ith caution untilyou can safely pulloffthe road.Stop and
inspect the tires for dam age.Ifa tire is under-inflated or dam aged,
deflate it,rem ove w heeland replace it w ith your spare tire and w heel.If
you cannot detect a cause,have the vehicle tow ed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
148
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end ofyour
vehicle to becom e m isaligned or cause dam age to your tires.Ifyour
vehicle seem s to pullto one side w hen youre driving,the w heels m ay be
out ofalignm ent.H ave an authorized dealer check the w heelalignm ent
periodically.
W heelm isalignm ent in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadw ear ofyour tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front w heeldrive (FW D ) vehicles and those w ith an independent rear
suspension (ifequipped) m ay require alignm ent ofallfour w heels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically.A n unbalanced tire and
w heelassem bly m ay result in irregular tire w ear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recom m ended interval(as indicated in the
scheduled mai ntenance i nformati on that com es w ith your vehicle) w ill
help your tires w ear m ore evenly,providing better tire perform ance and
longer tire life.U nless otherw ise specified,rotate the tires approxim ately
every 5,000 m iles (8,000 km ).
Front W heelD rive (FW D )
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram )
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
149
Rear W heelD rive (RW D )
vehicles/Four W heelD rive
(4W D )/A llW heelD rive (AW D )
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram )
Som etim es irregular tire w ear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: Ifyour tires show uneven w ear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any w heelm isalignm ent,tire im balance or m echanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle m ay be equipped w ith a dissim ilar spare tire/w heel.A
dissim ilar spare tire/w heelis defined as a spare tire and/or w heelthat is
different in brand,size or appearance from the road tires and w heels.If
you have a dissim ilar spare tire/w heelit is intended for tem porary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: A fter having your tires rotated,inflation pressure m ust be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirem ents.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U .S.and Canada Federalregulations require tire m anufacturers to
place standardized inform ation on the sidew allofalltires.This
inform ation identifies and describes the fundam entalcharacteristics of
the tire and also provides a U .S.D O T Tire Identification N um ber for
safety standard certification and in case ofa recall.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
150
Information on P type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an exam ple ofa
tire size,load index and speed
rating.The definitions ofthese
item s are listed below.(N ote that
the tire size,load index and speed
rating for your vehicle m ay be
different from this exam ple.)
1.P: Indicates a tire,designated by
the Tire and Rim A ssociation
(T& RA ),that m ay be used for
service on cars,SU Vs,m inivans and
light trucks.
Note: Ifyour tire size does not
begin w ith a letter this m ay m ean it
is designated by either E TRTO
(E uropean Tire and Rim TechnicalO rganization) or JATM A (Japan Tire
M anufacturing A ssociation).
2.215: Indicates the nom inalw idth ofthe tire in m illim eters from
sidew alledge to sidew alledge.In general,the larger the num ber,the
w ider the tire.
3.65: Indicates the aspect ratio w hich gives the tires ratio ofheight to
w idth.
4.R: Indicates a radialtype tire.
5.15: Indicates the w heelor rim diam eter in inches.Ifyou change your
w heelsize,you w illhave to purchase new tires to m atch the new w heel
diam eter.
6.95: Indicates the tires load index.It is an index that relates to how
m uch w eight a tire can carry.You m ay find this inform ation in your
Owners Gui de. Ifnot,contact a localtire dealer.
Note: You m ay not find this inform ation on alltires because it is not
required by federallaw.
7.H: Indicates the tires speed rating.The speed rating denotes the
speed at w hich a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
tim e under a standard condition ofload and inflation pressure.The tires
on your vehicle m ay operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure.These speed ratings m ay need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions.The ratings range from 81 m ph (130 km /h) to 186 m ph
(299 km /h).These ratings are listed in the follow ing chart.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
151
Note: You m ay not find this inform ation on alltires because it is not
required by federallaw.
Letter rating Speedrating- mph (km/h)
M 81 m ph (130 km /h)
N 87 m ph (140 km /h)
Q 99 m ph (159 km /h)
R 106 m ph (171 km /h)
S 112 m ph (180 km /h)
T 118 m ph (190 km /h)
U 124 m ph (200 km /h)
H 130 m ph (210 km /h)
V 149 m ph (240 km /h)
W 168 m ph (270 km /h)
Y 186 m ph (299 km /h)
Note: For tires w ith a m axim um speed capability over 149 m ph (240
km /h),tire m anufacturers som etim es use the letters ZR.For those w ith
a m axim um speed capability over 186 m ph (299 km /h),tire
m anufacturers alw ays use the letters ZR.
8.U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins w ith the
letters D O Tand indicates that the tire m eets allfederalstandards.The
next tw o num bers or letters are the plant code designating w here it w as
m anufactured,the next tw o are the tire size code and the last four
num bers represent the w eek and year the tire w as built.For exam ple,
the num bers 317 m ean the 31st w eek of1997.A fter 2000 the num bers
go to four digits.For exam ple,2501 m eans the 25th w eek of2001.The
num bers in betw een are identification codes used for traceability.This
inform ation is used to contact custom ers ifa tire defect requires a recall.
9.M+S or M/S: M ud and Snow,or
AT: A llTerrain,or
AS: A llSeason.
10.Tire Ply Composition andMaterial Used: Indicates the num ber of
plies or the num ber oflayers ofrubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidew all.Tire m anufacturers also m ust indicate the ply m aterials in the
tire and the sidew all,w hich include steel,nylon,polyester,and others.
11.MaximumLoad: Indicates the m axim um load in kilogram s and
pounds that can be carried by the tire.Refer to the Safety Com pliance
Certification Label,w hich is located on the B-Pillar or the edge ofthe
drivers door,for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
152
12.Treadwear, Traction andTemperature Grades
Treadwear: The treadw ear grade is a com parative rating based on the
w ear rate ofthe tire w hen tested under controlled conditions on a
specified governm ent test course.For exam ple,a tire graded 150
w ould w ear one and one-half(1
1
2) tim es as w ellon the governm ent
course as a tire graded 100.
Traction: The traction grades,from highest to low est are A A ,A ,B,
and C.The grades represent the tires ability to stop on w et pavem ent
as m easured under controlled conditions on specified governm ent test
surfaces ofasphalt and concrete.A tire m arked C m ay have poor
traction perform ance.
Temperature: The tem perature grades are A (the highest),B and C,
representing the tires resistance to the generation ofheat and its
ability to dissipate heat w hen tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test w heel.
13.MaximumPermissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
m anufacturersm axim um perm issible pressure and/or the pressure at
w hich the m axim um load can be carried by the tire.This pressure is
norm ally higher than the m anufacturers recom m ended cold inflation
pressure w hich can be found on the Safety Com pliance Certification
Labelor Tire Labelw hich is located on the B-Pillar or the edge ofthe
drivers door.The cold inflation pressure should never be set low er than
the recom m ended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers m ay have additionalm arkings,notes or w arnings such
as standard load,radialtubeless,etc.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
153
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for LT type
tires
LTtype tires have som e additional
inform ation beyond those ofP
type tires;these differences are
described below :
1.LT: Indicates a tire,designated by
the Tire and Rim A ssociation
(T& RA ),that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2.LoadRange/LoadInflation
Limits: Indicates the tires
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation lim its.
3.MaximumLoadDual lb. (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
m axim um load and tire pressure
w hen the tire is used as a dual;defined as four tires on the rear axle (a
totalofsix or m ore tires on the vehicle).
4.MaximumLoadSingle lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
m axim um load and tire pressure w hen the tire is used as a single;
defined as tw o tires (total) on the rear axle.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
154
Information on T type tires
Ttype tires have som e additional
inform ation beyond those ofP
type tires;these differences are
described below :
T145/80D 16 is an exam ple ofa tire
size.
Note: The tem porary tire size for
your vehicle m ay be different from
this exam ple.
1.T: Indicates a type oftire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
A ssociation (T& RA ),that is
intended for tem porary service on
cars,SU Vs,m inivans and light
trucks.
2.145: Indicates the nom inalw idth
ofthe tire in m illim eters from
sidew alledge to sidew alledge.In general,the larger the num ber,the
w ider the tire.
3.80: Indicates the aspect ratio w hich gives the tires ratio ofheight to
w idth.N um bers of70 or low er indicate a short sidew all.
4.D: Indicates a diagonaltype tire.
R: Indicates a radialtype tire.
5.16: Indicates the w heelor rim diam eter in inches.Ifyou change your
w heelsize,you w illhave to purchase new tires to m atch the new w heel
diam eter.
Location of the tire label
You w illfind a Tire Labelcontaining tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other im portant inform ation located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the drivers door.Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehi cle loadi ng wi th and wi thout a trai ler section.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
155
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
E ach tire,including the spare (if
provided),should be checked
m onthly w hen cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recom m ended
by the vehicle m anufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.(Ifyour vehicle has tires
ofa different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label,you should determ ine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
A s an added safety feature,your vehicle has been equipped w ith a tire
pressure m onitoring system (TPM S) that illum inates a low tire pressure
telltale w hen one or m ore ofyour tires is significantly under-inflated.
A ccordingly,w hen the low tire pressure telltale illum inates,you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,and inflate them to the
proper pressure.D riving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.U nder-inflation also reduces
fuelefficiency and tire tread life,and m ay affect the vehicles handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPM S is not a substitute for proper tire
m aintenance,and it is the drivers responsibility to m aintain correct tire
pressure,even ifunder-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger
illum ination ofthe TPM S low tire pressure telltale.
The Tire Pressure M onitoring System com plies w ith part 15 ofthe FCC
rules and w ith RS-210 ofIndustry Canada.O peration is subject to the
follow ing tw o conditions:(1) This device m ay not cause harm ful
interference,and (2) This device m ust accept any interference received,
including interference that m ay cause undesired operation.
The Tire Pressure M onitoring System is N O T a substitute for
m anually checking tire pressure.The tire pressure should be
checked periodically (at least m onthly) using a tire gauge,see
Inflati ng your ti res in this chapter.Failure to properly m aintain your
tire pressure could increase the risk oftire failure,loss ofcontrol,
vehicle rollover and personalinjury.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
156
Changingtires with TPMS
Each roadtire is equippedwith
a tire pressure sensor fastened
to the inside rimof the wheel.
The pressure sensor is covered
by the tire andis not visible
unless the tire is removed. The
pressure sensor is located
opposite (180 degrees) fromthe
valve stem. Care must be taken
when changingthe tire to avoid
damagingthe sensor. It is
recom m ended that you alw ays have
your tires serviced by an authorized
dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked
periodically (at least m onthly) using
an accurate tire gauge,refer to
Inflati ng your ti res in this chapter.
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure M onitoring System m easures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle every
m inute w hile you are driving and once every 6 hours w hen your vehicle
is parked.The Low Tire W arning Lam p w illturn O N ifthe tire pressure
is 25% below the pressure listed on the Safety Com pliance Certification
Label(approxim ately 6 to 9 psibelow the m anufacturers recom m end
tire pressure).Ifthe tire pressure increases 2 psiabove the Light O N
threshold,then the TPM S light w illturn O FF.O nce the light is
illum inated,your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the
m anufacturers recom m ended tire pressure.E ven ifthe light turns O N
and a short tim e later turns O FF,your tire pressure stillneeds to be
checked.
In short,once the light has turned O N ,at least one tire m ay be under
inflated.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
157
When your temporary spare tire is installed (if equipped)
W hen one ofyour road tires needs to be replaced w ith the tem porary
spare (T-type spare/M inispare or D issim ilar spare),the TPM S system
w illcontinue to identify an issue to rem ind you that the dam aged road
w heel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle.D uring this
tim e,the low tire w arning light can periodically return or stay on,
depending on the state ofthe dam aged road w heel/tire.This w illinclude
m essages from the m essage center (ifequipped).
To restore the fullfunctionality ofthe Tire Pressure M onitoring System ,
have the dam aged road w heel/tire repaired and rem ounted on your
vehicle.For additionalinform ation,refer to Changi ng ti res wi th TPMS
in this section.
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The m ain function ofthe Tire Pressure M onitoring System is to w arn you
w hen your tires need air.It can also w arn you in the event the system is
no longer capable offunctioning as intended.Please refer to the
follow ing chart for inform ation concerning your Tire Pressure M onitoring
System :
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
158
LowTire Pressure
WarningLight
Possible cause Customer Action Required
Solid W arning Light Tire(s)
under-inflated
1.Check your tire pressure to
ensure they are properly
inflated;refer to Inflati ng
your ti res in this chapter.Ford
M otor Com pany recom m ends
the use ofa digitalor dial-type
tire pressure gauge rather than
a stick-type tire pressure gauge
for increased accuracy.
2.A fter inflating your tires to
the m anufacturers
recom m ended inflation
pressure show n on the Safety
Com pliance Certification Label
(located on the edge ofdrivers
door or the B-Pillar) the
vehicle m ust be driven for at
least tw o m inutes over 20 m ph
(32 km /h) before the light w ill
turn O FF.
Spare tire in use Your tem porary spare tire is in
use.Repair the dam aged road
w heel/tire and reinstallit on
the vehicle to restore system
functionality.For a description
on how the system functions,
refer to Changi ng Ti res wi th
TPMS in this section.
TPM S
m alfunction
Ifyour tires are properly
inflated and your spare tire is
not in use and the light
rem ains O N ,have the system
inspected by your authorized
dealer.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
159
LowTire Pressure
WarningLight
Possible cause Customer Action Required
Flashing W arning
Light (flashes for a
short tim e either at
start-up or w hile
driving)
Spare tire in use Your tem porary spare tire is in
use.Repair the dam aged road
w heeland re-m ount it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality.For a description
ofhow the system functions
under these conditions,refer to
Changi ng ti res wi th TPMS in
this section.
TPM S
m alfunction
Ifyour tires are properly
inflated and your spare tire is
not in use and a flashing TPM S
w arning light is stillpresent,
have the system inspected by
your authorized dealer.
When inflating your tires
W hen putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage),the Tire Pressure M onitoring System m ay not respond
im m ediately to the air added to your tires.H ere are the details:
The tire pressure sensors m ounted in your w heels updates your
vehicle w ith tire pressure inform ation only once every m inute,
therefore it m ay take up to tw o m inutes ofdriving over 20 m ph
(32 km /h) for the light to turn O FF after you have filled your tires to
the recom m ended tire pressure.
Ifyour vehicle has been parked for over 30 m inutes,the sensors go
into a low pow er m ode to conserve battery life and therefore only
transm it about once every 6 hours.Ifyou inflate your tires under
these conditions,it m ay take up to tw o m inutes ofdriving over
20 m ph (32 km /h) for the light to turn O FF after you have filled your
tires to the recom m ended tire pressure.
For these reasons,the low tire pressure w arning light is N O T a
substitute for using an accurate tire gauge w hen checking and filling
your tires.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
160
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure M onitoring System (TPM S) m onitors tire pressure in
each pneum atic tire.The pressure in each tire is dependent upon several
factors,one ofthem being the contained air tem perature (tem perature of
the air inside the tire).A s the contained air tem perature increases,the
tire pressure also increases.W hile driving in a norm alm anner,a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure m ay increase approxim ately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation.This increase in tire pressure
is due to an increase in the contained air tem perature.Contained air
tem perature is dependent upon severalfactors such as rate oftire
rotation,tire deflection,am ount ofbraking,etc.In a sim ilar m anner,the
tire pressure w illdecrease ifthe contained air tem perature decreases.
For exam ple,ifthe vehicle is stationary over night w ith the outside
tem perature significantly low er than the daytim e tem perature,the tire
pressure m ay decrease approxim ately 3 psi(20.7 kPa) for a drop of30
F (16.6 C) in am bient tem perature.This low er pressure value m ay be
detected by the TPM S as being significantly low er than the cold pressure
indicated on your vehicles Safety Com pliance Certification Label,and
activate the TPM S w arning for low tire pressure.Ifthe low tire pressure
w arning light is O N ,visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat.
Ifone or m ore tires are flat,repair as necessary.Check air pressure in
the road tires.Ifany tire is underinflated,carefully drive the vehicle to
the nearest location w here air can be added to the tires.Turn the
ignition to the O FF position.Inflate allthe tires to the recom m ended
inflation pressure.
The Tire Pressure M onitoring System is N O T a substitute for
m anually checking tire pressure.The tire pressure should be
checked periodically (at least m onthly) using an accurate tire gauge,
see Inflati ng your ti res in this chapter.Failure to properly m aintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk oftire failure,loss ofcontrol,
vehicle rollover and personalinjury.
USING SNOW TIRES AND TRACTION DEVICES
Snow tires m ust be the sam e size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.
The tires on your vehicle have all-w eather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow.H ow ever,in som e clim ates,using snow tires or traction
devices m ay be necessary.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
161
Follow these guidelines w hen using snow tires and traction devices:
SA E class Scables should O N LY be used on the front axle for
P235/70R16 tires.W ith P225/75R15 and P215/70R16 tires,SA E class
Scables can be used on both the front and rear w heels.
Installcables or chains securely,verifying that the cables or chains do
not touch any w iring,brake lines or fuellines.
D rive cautiously.Ifyou hear the cables or chains rub or bang against
the vehicle,stop and retighten them .Ifthis does not w ork,rem ove the
cables or chains to prevent vehicle dam age.
Avoid overloading your vehicle.
Rem ove the cables or chains w hen they are no longer needed.
D o not use cables or chains on dry roads.
D o not exceed 30 m ph (48 km /h) w ith tire cables or chains on your
vehicle.
Consult your authorized dealer for inform ation on other Ford M otor
Com pany approved m ethods oftraction control.
VEHICLE LOADING WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section w illguide you in the proper loading ofyour vehicle and/or
trailer,to keep your loaded vehicle w eight w ithin its design rating
capability,w ith or w ithout a trailer.Properly loading your vehicle w ill
provide m axim um return ofvehicle design perform ance.Before loading
your vehicle,fam iliarize yourselfw ith the follow ing term s for determ ining
your vehicles w eight ratings,w ith or w ithout a trailer,from the vehicles
Safety Com pliance Certification Label:
Base CurbWeight is the w eight ofthe vehicle including a fulltank of
fueland allstandard equipm ent.It does not include passengers,cargo,or
optionalequipm ent.
Vehicle CurbWeight is the w eight ofyour new vehicle w hen you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any afterm arket
equipm ent.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
162
Payloadis the com bined w eight ofcargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying.The m axim um payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Labelon the B-Pillar or the edge ofthe drivers door
(vehicles exported outside the U S and Canada m ay not have a Tire
Label).Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kgOR XXX lb. for
m axim um payload.The payload listed on the Tire Labelis the m axim um
payload for the vehicle as built by the assem bly plant.Ifany afterm arket
or authorized-dealer installed equipm ent has been installed on the
vehicle,the w eight ofthe equipm ent m ust be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Labelin order to determ ine the new payload.
The appropriate loading capacity ofyour vehicle can be lim ited
either by volum e capacity (how m uch space is available) or by
payload capacity (how m uch w eight the vehicle should carry).O nce
you have reached the m axim um payload ofyour vehicle,do not add
m ore cargo,even ifthere is space available.O verloading or im properly
loading your vehicle can contribute to loss ofvehicle controland
vehicle rollover.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
163
Example only:
Cargo Weight includes allw eight added to the Base Curb W eight,
including cargo and optionalequipm ent.W hen tow ing,trailer tongue load
or king pin w eight is also part ofcargo w eight.
GAW(Gross Axle Weight) is the totalw eight placed on each axle
(front and rear) including vehicle curb w eight and allpayload.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
164
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is the m axim um allow able
w eight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear).These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
locatedon the B-Pillar or the edge of the drivers door. The total
loadon each axle must never exceedits GAWR.
E xceeding the Safety Com pliance Certification Labelaxle w eight
rating lim its could result in substandard vehicle handling or
perform ance,engine,transm ission and/or structuraldam age,serious
dam age to the vehicle,loss ofcontroland personalinjury.
Note: For trailer tow ing inform ation refer to Trai ler towi ng found in
this chapter or the RV and Trai ler Towi ng Gui de provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW(Gross Vehicle Weight) is the Vehicle Curb W eight + cargo +
passengers.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
165
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) is the m axim um
allow able w eight ofthe fully loaded
vehicle (including alloptions,
equipm ent,passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label locatedon the B-Pillar or
the edge of the drivers door.
The GVWmust never exceedthe
GVWR.
E xceeding the Safety Com pliance Certification Labelvehicle
w eight rating lim its could result in substandard vehicle handling
or perform ance,engine,transm ission and/or structuraldam age,serious
dam age to the vehicle,loss ofcontroland personalinjury.
GCW(Gross CombinedWeight) is the w eight ofthe loaded vehicle
(G VW ) plus the w eight ofthe fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross CombinedWeight Rating) is the m axim um allow able
w eight ofthe vehicle and the loaded trailer including allcargo and
passengers that the vehicle can handle w ithout risking dam age.
(Im portant:The tow ing vehicles braking system is rated for operation at
G VW R,not at G CW R.) Separate functionalbrakes should be used for
safe controloftow ed vehicles and for trailers w here the G CW ofthe
tow ing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the G VW R ofthe tow ing vehicle.
The GCWmust never exceedthe GCWR.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
166
MaximumLoadedTrailer Weight is the highest possible w eight ofa
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow.It assum es a vehicle w ith only
m andatory options,no cargo (internalor external),a tongue load of
1015% (conventionaltrailer) or king pin w eight of1525% (fifth w heel
trailer),and driver only (150 lb.[68 kg]).Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trai ler Towi ng Gui de providedby your
authorizeddealer) for more detailedinformation.
Tongue Loador Fifth Wheel KingPin Weight refers to the am ount
ofthe w eight that a trailer pushes dow n on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb.(2,268 kg) conventionaltrailer,m ultiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg).For an 11,500 lb.(5,216 kg) fifth w heeltrailer,m ultiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of1,725 to 2,875
lb.(782 to 1,304 kg)
D o not exceed the G VW R or the G AW R specified on the Safety
Com pliance Certification Label.
D o not use replacem ent tires w ith low er load carrying capacities
than the originals because they m ay low er the vehicles G VW R
and G AW R lim itations.Replacem ent tires w ith a higher lim it than the
originals do not increase the G VW R and G AW R lim itations.
E xceeding any vehicle w eight rating lim itation could result in
serious dam age to the vehicle and/or personalinjury.
Steps for determiningthe correct loadlimit:
1.Locate the statem ent The com bined w eight ofoccupants and cargo
should never exceed X X X kg or X X X lbs.on your vehicles placard.
2.D eterm ine the com bined w eight ofthe driver and passengers that w ill
be riding in your vehicle.
3.Subtract the com bined w eight ofthe driver and passengers from X X X
kg or X X X lbs.
4.The resulting figure equals the available am ount ofcargo and luggage
load capacity.For exam ple,ifthe X X X am ount equals 1,400 lbs.and
there w illbe five 150 lb.passengers in your vehicle,the am ount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.(1400750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.).In m etric units (635340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
167
5.D eterm ine the com bined w eight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle.That w eight m ay not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6.Ifyour vehicle w illbe tow ing a trailer,load from your trailer w illbe
transferred to your vehicle.Consult this m anualto determ ine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.
The follow ing gives you a few exam ples on how to calculate the available
am ount ofcargo and luggage load capacity:
A nother exam ple for your vehicle w ith 1400 lb.(635 kg) ofcargo and
luggage capacity.You decide to go golfing.Is there enough load
capacity to carry you,4 ofyour friends and allthe golfbags? You and
four friends average 220 lb.(99 kg) each and the golfbags w eigh
approxim ately 30 lb.(13.5 kg) each.The calculation w ould be:1400
(5 x 220) (5 x 30) = 1400 1100 150 = 150 lb.Yes,you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golfbags.In m etric units,the calculation w ould be:635 kg (5
x 99 kg) (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 495 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
A finalexam ple for your vehicle w ith 1400 lb.(635 kg) ofcargo and
luggage capacity.You and one ofyour friends decide to pick up
cem ent from the localhom e im provem ent store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years.M easuring the inside of
the vehicle w ith the rear seat folded dow n,you have room for 12-100
lb.(45 kg) bags ofcem ent.D o you have enough load capacity to
transport the cem ent to your hom e? Ifyou and your friend each w eigh
220 lb.(99 kg),the calculation w ould be:1400 (2 x 220) (12 x
100) = 1400 440 1200 = 240 lb.N o,you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that m uch w eight.In m etric units,the
calculation w ould be:635 kg (2 x 99 kg) (12 x 45 kg) = 635
198 540 = 103 kg.You w illneed to reduce the load w eight by at
least 240 lb.(104 kg).Ifyou rem ove 3-100 lb.(45 kg) cem ent bags,
then the load calculation w ould be:
1400 (2 x 220) (9 x 100) = 1400 440 900 = 60 lb.N ow you
have the load capacity to transport the cem ent and your friend hom e..
In m etric units,the calculation w ould be:635 kg (2 x 99 kg) (9
x 45 kg) = 635 198 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assum e that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a m anner that does not overload the Front or the Rear G ross
A xle W eight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Com pliance
Certification Labelfound on the edge ofthe drivers door.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
168
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
For im portant inform ation regarding safe operation ofthis type
ofvehicle,see the Prepari ng to dri ve your vehi cle section in
the Dri vi ng chapter ofthis Owners Gui de.
Loaded vehicles m ay handle differently than unloaded vehicles.
E xtra precautions,such as slow er speeds and increased stopping
distance,should be taken w hen driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haulm ore cargo and people than m ost passenger cars.
D epending upon the type and placem ent ofthe load,hauling cargo and
people m ay raise the center ofgravity ofthe vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer tow ing w ith your vehicle m ay require the use ofa trailer tow
option package.
Trailer tow ing puts additionalloads on your vehicles engine,transaxle,
axle,brakes,tires,and suspension.For your safety and to m axim ize
vehicle perform ance,be sure to use the proper equipm ent w hile tow ing.
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe tow ing procedure:
Stay w ithin your vehicles load lim its.
Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for tow ing.Refer to Prepari ng to
tow in this chapter.
U se extra caution w hen driving w hile trailer tow ing.Refer to Dri vi ng
whi le you tow in this chapter.
Service your vehicle m ore frequently ifyou tow a trailer.Refer to the
severe duty schedule in the scheduled m aintenance guide.
D o not tow a trailer untilyour vehicle has been driven at least 800 km
(500 m iles).
Refer to the instructions included w ith tow ing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustm ent specifications.
D o not exceed the m axim um loads listed on the Safety Com pliance
Certification Label.For load specification term s found on the label,refer
to Vehi cle loadi ng in this chapter.Rem em ber to figure in the tongue
load ofyour loaded vehicle w hen figuring the totalw eight.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
169
4x2
GCWR (Gross CombinedWeight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Engine Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Trailer Weight
Range - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
frontal area of
trailer - ft
2
(m)
2
2.3L w /m anual
transm ission
4860 (2204) 1500 (680) 24 (2.2)
2.3L
w /autom atic
transm ission
4940 (2241) 1500 (680) 24 (2.2 )
3.0L
w /autom atic
transm ission
7080 (3211 ) 3500 (1588) 30 (2.8)
Notes: For high altitude operation,reduce G CW by 2% per 1000 ft.
(300 m eters) elevation.For definitions ofterm s and instructions on
calculating your vehicles load,refer to Vehi cle loadi ng in this chapter.
M axim um trailer w eights show n.The com bined w eight ofthe
com pleted tow ing vehicle and the loaded trailer m ust not exceed the
G CW R.
The E scape is capable ofpulling the m axim um trailer w eight(s) as
specified above.Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified w eight.The E scape vehicle electricalsystem is not
equipped to accom m odate electric trailer brakes.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
170
4x4
GCWR (Gross CombinedWeight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Engine Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Trailer Weight
Range - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
frontal area of
trailer - ft
2
(m)
2
2.3L w /m anual
transm ission
5040 (2286) 1500 (680) 24 (2.2)
2.3L
w /autom atic
transm ission
5100 (2313) 1500 (680 ) 24 (2.2)
3.0L
w /autom atic
transm ission
7240 (3284 ) 3500 (1588 ) 30 (2.8)
Notes: For high altitude operation,reduce G CW by 2% per 1000 ft.
(300 m eters) elevation.For definitions ofterm s and instructions on
calculating your vehicles load,refer to Vehi cle loadi ng in this chapter.
M axim um trailer w eights show n.The com bined w eight ofthe
com pleted tow ing vehicle and the loaded trailer m ust not exceed the
G CW R.
The E scape is capable ofpulling the m axim um trailer w eight(s) as
specified above.Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified w eight.The E scape vehicle electricalsystem is not
equipped to accom m odate electric trailer brakes.
D o not exceed the G VW R or the G AW R specified on the
certification label.
Tow ing trailers beyond the m axim um recom m ended gross trailer
w eight exceeds the lim it ofthe vehicle and could result in
engine dam age,transm ission dam age,structuraldam age,loss ofvehicle
control,vehicle rollover and personalinjury.
Preparing to tow
U se the proper equipm ent for tow ing a trailer and m ake sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle.See your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer ifyou require assistance.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
171
Hitches
D o not use hitches that clam p onto the vehicle bum per.U se a load
carrying hitch.You m ust distribute the load in your trailer so that
1015% ofthe totalw eight ofthe trailer is on the tongue.
Safety chains
A lw ays connect the trailers safety chains to hook retainers on the
vehicle.To connect the trailers safety chains,cross the chains under the
trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
Ifyou use a rentaltrailer,follow the instructions that the rentalagency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
E lectric,m anual,autom atic or surge-type brakes,ifcom patible w ith the
vehicle,are safe ifinstalled properly and adjusted to the m anufacturers
specifications.The trailer brakes m ust m eet localand Federal
regulations.
D o not connect a trailers hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicles brake system .Your vehicle m ay not have enough
braking pow er and your chances ofhaving a collision greatly increase.
The braking system ofthe tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
G VW R not G CW R.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lam ps are required on m ost tow ed vehicles.M ake sure allrunning
lights,brake lights,turn signals and hazard lights are w orking.D o not
connect trailer lam ps directly to your vehicles taillam ps.This can cause
dam age to your vehicles electricalsystem .See your authorized dealer or
trailer rentalagency for proper instructions and equipm ent for hooking
up trailer lam ps.
Driving while you tow
W hen tow ing a trailer:
K eep your speed no faster than 70 m ph (112 km /h) during the first
500 m iles (800 km ) oftow ing a trailer,and dont m ake fullthrottle
starts.
Turn offthe speed control.The speed controlm ay shut off
autom atically w hen you are tow ing on long,steep grades.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
172
Consult your localm otor vehicle speed regulations for tow ing a trailer.
To elim inate excessive shifting,use a low er gear.This w illalso assist
in transm ission cooling.(For additionalinform ation,refer to
Understandi ng the gearshi ft posi ti ons of the 4speed automati c
transmi ssi on in the Dri vi ng chapter.
A nticipate stops and brake gradually.
D o not exceed the G CW R rating or transm ission dam age m ay occur.
Servicing after towing
Ifyou tow a trailer for long distances,your vehicle w illrequire m ore
frequent service intervals.Refer to your Scheduled Mai ntenance
Informati on for m ore inform ation.
Trailer towing tips
Practice turning,stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feelofthe vehicle trailer com bination.W hen turning,m ake
w ider turns so the trailer w heels w illclear curbs and other obstacles.
A llow m ore distance for stopping w ith a trailer attached.
Ifyou are driving dow n a long or steep hill,shift to a low er gear.D o
not apply the brakes continuously,as they m ay overheat and becom e
less effective.
The trailer tongue w eight should be 1015% ofthe loaded trailer
w eight.
Ifyou w illbe tow ing a trailer frequently in hot w eather,hilly
conditions,at G CW ,or any com bination ofthese factors,consider
refilling your rear axle w ith synthetic gear lube ifnot already so
equipped.Refer to the Mai ntenance and speci fi cati ons chapter for
the lubricant specification.Rem em ber that regardless ofthe rear axle
lube used,do not tow a trailer for the first 500 m iles (800 km ) ofa
new vehicle,and that the first 500 m iles (800 km ) oftow ing be done
at no faster than 70 m ph (112 km /h) w ith no fullthrottle starts.
A fter you have traveled 50 m iles (80 km ),thoroughly check your
hitch,electricalconnections and trailer w heellug nuts.
To aid in engine/transm ission cooling and A /C efficiency during hot
w eather w hile stopped in traffic,place the gearshift lever in P (Park).
Vehicles w ith trailers should not be parked on a grade.Ifyou m ust
park on a grade,place w heelchocks under the trailers w heels.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
173
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiringto the trailer before backingthe trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiringto the trailer after the
trailer is removedfromthe water.
W hen backing dow n a ram p during boat launching or retrieval:
do not allow the static w ater levelto rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bum per.
do not allow w aves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm ) above the
bottom edge ofthe rear bum per.
E xceeding these lim its m ay allow w ater to enter vehicle com ponents:
causing internaldam age to the com ponents.
affecting driveability,em issions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any tim e the axle has been subm erged in
w ater.Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
A n exam ple ofrecreationaltow ingis tow ing your vehicle behind a
m otorhom e.
Ifyour vehicle is autom atic transaxle equipped,w ith a 4x2 (front-w heel
drive only) configured pow ertrain,recreationaltow ingis perm itted by
trailering the vehicle w ith its front w heels on a dolly.This protects the
transm issions internalm echanicalcom ponents from potentiallack of
lubrication dam age.
Ifyour vehicle is autom atic transaxle equipped and 4W D (all-w heel
drive),recreationaltow ingis perm itted only ifthe vehicle is trailered
w ith allfour (4) w heels offthe ground.O therw ise,no recreational
tow ingis perm itted.
Ifyour vehicle is m anualtransaxle equipped and 2W D or 4W D ,shifting
the transaxle into neutralperm its flat-tow ing(allw heels on the
ground) for pulling behind a m otorhom e.Your vehicle,w ith w ell
designed tow ing equipm ent,m ay be tow ed up to a speed of113 km /h
(70 m ph) but you should alw ays obey localspeed lim its.
For other tow ing requirem ents,refer to Wrecker towi ng in the Roadsi de
Emergenci es chapter.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
174
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1.LO CK ,locks the gearshift lever
and steering colum n and allow s key
rem oval.
2.A CCE SSO RY,allow s the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate w hile the engine is not
running.
3.RU N ,allelectricalcircuits
operationaland w arning lights w ill
illum inate.This is the position the
key is in w hen youre driving.
4.STA RT,cranks the engine.Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
E ngine starting is controlled by the pow ertrain controlsystem .This
system m eets allCanadian Interference-Causing E quipm ent standard
requirem ents regulating the im pulse electricalfield strength ofradio
noise.
W hen starting a fuel-injected engine,avoid pressing the accelerator
before or during starting.O nly use the accelerator w hen you have
difficulty starting the engine.For m ore inform ation on starting the
vehicle,refer to Starti ng the engi ne in this chapter.
E xtended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
tem peratures in the engine and exhaust system ,creating the risk
offire or other dam age.
D o not park,idle,or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover.The em ission system heats up the engine
com partm ent and exhaust system ,w hich can start a fire.
D o not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas.E xhaust fum es can be toxic.A lw ays open the garage door
before you start the engine.See Guardi ng agai nst exhaust fumes in
this chapter for m ore instructions.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
175
Ifyou sm ellexhaust fum es inside your vehicle,have your dealer
inspect your vehicle im m ediately.D o not drive ifyou sm ell
exhaust fum es.
Important safety precautions
W hen the engine starts,the idle RPM runs faster to w arm the engine.If
the engine idle speed does not slow dow n autom atically,have the vehicle
checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
1.M ake sure allvehicle occupants buckle their safety belts.For m ore
inform ation on safety belts and their proper usage,refer to the Seati ng
and Safety Restrai nts chapter.
2.M ake sure the headlam ps and electricalaccessories are off.
Ifstarting a vehicle w ith an
autom atic transm ission:
M ake sure the parking brake is
set.
M ake sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
P
R
N
D
2
1
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
176
Ifstarting a vehicle w ith a m anual
transm ission:
M ake sure the parking brake is
set.
Push the clutch pedalto the
floor.
3.Turn the key to 3 (RU N ) w ithout
turning the key to 4 (STA RT).
Som e w arning lights w illbriefly illum inate.See Warni ng li ghts and
chi mes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for m ore inform ation
regarding the w arning lights.
Starting the engine
1.Turn the key to 3 (RU N ) w ithout
turning the key to 4 (STA RT).If
there is difficulty in turning the key,
rotate the steering w heeluntilthe
key turns freely.This condition m ay
occur w hen:
the front w heels are turned
a front w heelis against the curb
Turn the key to 4 (STA RT),then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts.E xcessive cranking could dam age the starter.
Note: Ifthe engine does not start w ithin five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to 1 (LO CK ),w ait 10 seconds and try again.Ifthe engine
stillfails to start,press the accelerator to the floor and try again;this w ill
allow the engine to crank w ith the fuelshut offin case the engine is
flooded w ith fuel.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
177
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon m onoxide is present in exhaust fum es.Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
Ifyou sm ellexhaust fum es inside your vehicle,have your dealer
inspect your vehicle im m ediately.D o not drive ifyou sm ell
exhaust fum es.
Important ventilating information
Ifthe engine is idling w hile the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
tim e,open the w indow s at least one inch (2.5 cm ) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
USING THE ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
A n engine block heater w arm s the engine coolant w hich aids in starting
and heater/defroster perform ance.U se ofan engine block heater is
strongly recom m ended ifyou live in a region w here tem peratures reach
-10F (-23C) or below.For best results,plug the heater in at least three
hours before starting the vehicle.The heater can be plugged in the night
before starting the vehicle.
To reduce the risk ofelectricalshock,do not use your heater
w ith ungrounded electricalsystem s or tw o-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
BRAKES
O ccasionalbrake noise is norm al.Ifa m etal-to-m etal,continuous grinding
or continuous squealsound is present,the brake linings m ay be w orn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer.Ifthe vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering w heelw hile braking,the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Brake system warni ng
li ght in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for inform ation on the brake
system w arning light.
!
BRAKE
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
178
U nder norm aloperating conditions,brake dust m ay accum ulate on the
w heels.Som e brake dust is inevitable as brakes w ear and does not
contribute to brake noise.The use ofm odern friction m aterials w ith
em phasis on im proved perform ance and environm entalconsiderations
can lead to m ore dust than in the past.Brake dust can be cleaned by
w eekly w ashing w ith soapy w ater and a soft sponge.H eavier deposits can
be rem oved w ith M otorcraft W heeland Tire Cleaner (ZC-37A ).
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped w ith an A nti-lock Braking System (A BS).This
system helps you m aintain steering controlduring em ergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking.N oise from the A BS pum p m otor and
brake pedalpulsation m ay be observed during A BS braking and the
brake pedalm ay suddenly travela little farther as soon as A BS braking is
done and norm albrake operation resum es.These are norm al
characteristics ofthe A BS and should be no reason for concern.
Using ABS
W hen hard braking is required,apply continuous force on the brake
pedal;do not pum p the brake pedalsince this w illreduce the
effectiveness ofthe A BS and w illincrease your vehicles stopping
distance.The A BS w illbe activated im m ediately,allow ing you to retain
fullsteering controlduring hard braking and on slippery surfaces.
H ow ever,the A BS does not decrease stopping distance.
ABS warning lamp
The A BS lam p in the instrum ent
cluster m om entarily illum inates
w hen the ignition is turned on.If
the light does not illum inate during
start up,rem ains on or flashes,the
A BS m ay be disabled and m ay need to be serviced
E ven w hen the A BS is disabled,
norm albraking is stilleffective.(If
your BRA K E w arning lam p
illum inates w ith the parking brake
released,have your brake system
serviced im m ediately.)
ABS
!
BRAKE
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
179
Parking brake
To set the parking brake (1),pull
the parking brake handle up as far
as possible.
The BRA K E w arning lam p w ill
illum inate and w illrem ain
illum inated untilthe parking brake
is released.
To release,press and hold the button (2),pullthe handle up slightly,
then push the handle dow n.
A lw ays set the parking brake fully and m ake sure that the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (autom atic
transm ission) or in 1 (First) (m anualtransm ission).
Ifthe parking brake is fully released,but the brake w arning lam p
rem ains illum inated,the brakes m ay not be w orking properly.
See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
STEERING
To prevent dam age to the pow er steering system :
N ever hold the steering w heelat its furthest turning points (untilit
stops) for m ore than a few seconds w hen the engine is running
D o not operate the vehicle w ith a low pow er steering pum p fluid level
(below the M IN m ark on the reservoir).
Som e noise is norm alduring operation.Ifthe noise is excessive,check
for low pow er steering pum p fluid levelbefore seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
H eavy or uneven steering efforts m ay be caused by low pow er steering
pum p fluid level.Check for low pow er steering pum p fluid levelbefore
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
!
BRAKE
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
180
D o not fillthe pow er steering pum p reservoir above the M A X m ark on
the reservoir,as this m ay result in leaks from the reservoir.
Ifthe pow er steering system breaks dow n (or ifthe engine is turned
off),you can steer the vehicle m anually,but it takes m ore effort.Ifthe
steering w anders or pulls,check for:
an im properly inflated tire
uneven tire w ear
loose or w orn suspension com ponents
loose or w orn steering com ponents
im proper steering alignm ent
PREPARING TO DRIVE
other types ofvehicles.
to die than a person w earing a safety belt.
Your vehicle has larger tires and increased ground clearance,giving the
vehicle a higher center ofgravity than a passenger car.
Vehicles w ith a higher center ofgravity such as utility and
four-w heeldrive vehicles handle differently than vehicles w ith a
low er center ofgravity.U tility and four-w heeldrive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any m ore
than low -slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.Avoid sharp turns,excessive speed and abrupt
m aneuvers in these vehicles.Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk ofloss ofvehicle control,vehicle rollover,personal
injury and death.
Loaded vehicles,w ith a higher center ofgravity,m ay handle
differently than unloaded vehicles.E xtra precautions such as
slow er speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken w hen
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
181
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped w ith a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being m oved from P (Park) w hen the ignition is
in the RU N position unless brake pedalis depressed.
Ifyou cannot m ove the gearshift lever out ofP (Park) w ith ignition in
the RU N position and the brake pedaldepressed,it is possible that a
fuse has blow n or the vehicles brakelam ps are not operating properly.
Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadsi de Emergenci es chapter.
Ifthe fuse is not blow n,perform the follow ing procedure:
1.A pply the parking brake,turn the ignition to LO CK ,then rem ove the
key.
2.U sing a screw driver or sim ilar
tool,carefully pry out the sm all,
round,tethered Brake Transm ission
Shift Interlock (BTSI) cover cap
located to the right ofthe gearshift
lever.
3.Insert a screw driver or sim ilar
toolstraight dow n into the access
hole and press dow nw ard w hile
pulling the gearshift lever out ofthe
P (Park) position and into the N
(N eutral) position.
4.Rem ove tooland reinstallBTSItethered cover cap.
P
R
N
D
2
1
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
182
5.Start the vehicle and release the parking brake.
D o not drive your vehicle untilyou verify that the brakelam ps
are w orking.
A lw ays set the parking brake fully and m ake sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park).Turn the ignition to the LO CK position and
rem ove the key w henever you leave your vehicle.
See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Driving with an automatic overdrive transaxle
Your autom atic overdrive transaxle
provides fully autom atic operation in
either D (O verdrive) or w ith the
O /D O FF sw itch depressed.D riving
w ith the gearshift lever in D
(O verdrive) gives the best fuel
econom y for norm aldriving
conditions.
For m anualcontrol,start in 1
(First) and then shift m anually.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
183
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4speed automatic
transaxle
This vehicle is equipped w ith an adaptive Transm ission Shift Strategy.
A daptive Shift Strategy offers the optim altransm ission operation and shift
quality.W hen the vehicles battery has been disconnected for any type of
service or repair,the transm ission w illneed to relearn the norm alshift
strategy param eters,m uch like having to reset your radio stations w hen
your vehicle battery has been disconnected.The A daptive Transm ission
Strategy allow s the transm ission to relearn these operating param eters.This
learning process could take severaltransm ission upshifts and dow nshifts;
during this learning process,slightly firm er shifts m ay occur.A fter this
learning process,norm alshift feeland shift scheduling w illresum e.
P (Park)
This position locks the transaxle and prevents the front w heels from turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
Start the engine
D epress the brake pedal
M ove the gearshift lever into the desired gear
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
184
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
Com e to a com plete stop
M ove the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
R (Reverse)
W ith the gearshift lever in R (Reverse),the vehicle w illm ove backw ard.
A lw ays com e to a com plete stop before shifting into and out ofR (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
W ith the gearshift lever in N (N eutral),the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll.H old the brake pedaldow n w hile in this position.
D (Overdrive)
The norm aldriving position for the
best fueleconom y.Transaxle
operates in gears one through four.
D (O verdrive) can be deactivated by
pressing the O /D O FF sw itch on the
side ofthe gearshift lever.This w ill
illum inate the O /D O FF light and
activate D rive.
Drive (O/D OFF switch pressed)
D rive is activated w hen the O /D O FF sw itch is pressed.
This position allow s for allforw ard gears except overdrive.
O /D O FF light is illum inated.
Provides engine braking.
U se w hen driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O /D to
other gears.E xam ples:city traffic,hilly terrain,heavy loads,trailer
tow ing and w hen engine braking is required.
To return to O /D (overdrive m ode),press the O /D O FF sw itch.The
O /D O FF light w illnot be illum inated.
O /D (O verdrive) is autom atically returned each tim e the key is turned
off.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
185
2 (Second)
This position allow s for second gear only.
Provides engine braking.
U se to start-up on slippery roads.
To return to D (O verdrive),m ove the gearshift lever into the D
(O verdrive) position.
Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds w illcause the transaxle to
dow nshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.
1 (First)
Provides m axim um engine braking.
A llow s upshifts by m oving gearshift lever.
W illnot dow nshift into 1 (First) at high speeds;allow s for 1 (First)
w hen vehicle reaches slow er speeds.
W hen parking,do not use the gearshift in place ofthe parking
brake.A lw ays set the parking brake fully and m ake sure that the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).Turn offthe ignition
w henever you leave your vehicle.N ever leave your vehicle unattended
w hile it is running.Ifyou do not take these precautions,your vehicle
m ay m ove unexpectedly and injure som eone.
Forceddownshifts
A llow ed in D (O verdrive) or D rive.
D epress the accelerator to the floor.
A llow s transm ission to select an appropriate gear.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
Ifyour vehicle gets stuck in m ud or snow,it m ay be rocked out by
shifting betw een forw ard and reverse gears,stopping betw een shifts in a
steady pattern.Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission andtires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
186
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Using the clutch
Vehicles equipped w ith a m anualtransaxle have a starter interrupt interlock
that prevents cranking ofthe engine unless the clutch pedalis depressed.
W hen starting a vehicle w ith a m anualtransaxle,you m ust:
1.Put the gearshift lever in the
neutralposition.
2.H old dow n the brake pedal.
3.D epress the clutch pedalto the
floor.
4.W ithout depressing the
accelerator pedal,turn the ignition
to position 4 (STA RT),release the
ignition as soon as the engine starts.
5.Let the engine idle for a few
seconds.
6.Release the brake pedal,then
slow ly release the clutch pedalw hile
pressing dow n slow ly on the
accelerator pedal.
Do not drive with your foot restingon the clutch pedal anddo
not use the clutch pedal to holdyour vehicle at a standstill while
waitingon a hill. These actions will seriously reduce clutch life.
1
2 4 R
3 5
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
187
Recommended shift speeds
U pshift according to the follow ing charts for best fueleconom y:
Upshifts duringlight to moderate accelerations andcruises (for
best fuel economy)
Shift from :
1-2 10 m ph (16 km /h)
2-3 20 m ph (32 km /h)
3-4 32 m ph (52 km /h)
4-5 37 m ph (60 km /h)
Reverse
Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stopbefore you shift
into R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transaxle.
Put the gearshift lever into the
neutralposition and w ait at least
three seconds before shifting into R
(Reverse).
Note: You can shift into R (Reverse) only by m oving the gearshift lever
from left of3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) gears before you shift into R
(Reverse).This is a speciallockout feature w hich prevents you from
shifting into R (Reverse) w hen you dow nshift from 5 (Fifth).
1
2 4 R
3 5
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
188
Parking your vehicle
1.A pply the brake and shift into the
neutralposition.
2.Set the parking brake.
3.D epress the clutch,then shift into
1 (First).
1
2 4 R
3 5
1
2 4 R
3 5
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
189
4.Turn the ignition to position 1
(LO CK ) to shut the engine offand
rem ove the ignition key.
D o not park your vehicle in N eutral,it m ay m ove unexpectedly
and injure som eone.U se 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake
fully.
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to w arn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bum per w hen R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is m oving at speeds less than 3 m ph (5 km /h).The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 m ph (5 km /h) and m ay not detect certain
angular or m oving objects.
To help avoid personalinjury,please read and understand the
lim itations ofthe reverse sensing system as contained in this
section.Reverse sensing is only an aid for som e (generally large and
fixed) objects w hen m oving in reverse on a flat surface at parking
speeds.Inclem ent w eather m ay also affect the function ofthe RSS;
this m ay include reduced perform ance or a false activation.
To help avoid personalinjury,alw ays use caution w hen in
reverse and w hen using the RSS.
This system is not designed to prevent contact w ith sm allor
m oving objects.The system is designed to provide a w arning to
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid dam aging
the vehicle.The system m ay not detect sm aller objects,particularly
those close to the ground.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
190
Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,bike or
surfboard racks and any device that m ay block the norm al
detection zone ofthe RSS system m ay create false beeps.
The RSS detects obstacles up to 6
1
2
feet (2 m eters) from the rear
bum per w ith a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners ofthe
bum per,(refer to the figures for
approxim ate zone coverage areas).
A s you m ove closer to the obstacle,
the rate ofthe tone increases.W hen
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm ) aw ay,the tone w illsound
continuously.Ifthe RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm ) from the
side ofthe vehicle,the tone w ill
sound for only three seconds.O nce
the system detects an object
approaching,the tone w illsound
again.
The RSS autom atically turns on
w hen the gear selector is placed in
R (Reverse) and the ignition is on.
A n RSS controlallow s the driver to
turn the RSS on and off.To turn the RSS off,the ignition m ust be on.
The system w illrem ain offuntileither the RSS controlis pressed again
or the ignition is turned off,then on again.A n indicator light on the
controlw illillum inate w hen the system is turned off.Ifthe indicator
light illum inates w hen the RSS is not turned off,it m ay indicate a failure
in the RSS.
Keepthe RSS sensors (locatedon the rear bumper/fascia) free
fromsnow, ice andlarge accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharpobjects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
191
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misalignedor bent, the sensingzone may be alteredcausing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
For im portant inform ation regarding safe operation ofthis type
ofvehicle,see Prepari ng to dri ve your vehi cle in this chapter.
Your vehicle is equipped w ith an intelligent 4W D System that
continuously m onitors vehicle conditions and autom atically adjusts the
pow er distribution betw een the front and rear w heels.It com bines
transparent all-surface operation w ith highly capable four-w heeldrive.
The 4W D system is alw ays active and requires no driver input.It is
capable ofhandling allroad conditions,including street and highw ay
driving as w ellas off-road and w inter driving.
D uring very extrem e off-road events,the 4W D system has a heat
protection m ode to protect itselffrom dam age.Ifthe system detects an
overheat condition,it w illenter a locked m ode.Ifthe heat in the 4W D
system continues to rise in locked m ode,it w illdisable itself.To exit heat
protection m ode,sim ply stop the vehicle and allow it to coolfor five
m inutes w ith the key in the 3 (RU N ) position.
4WD system indicator lights
Blinks continuously w hen 4W D
system is disengaged (i.e.tw o
w heeldrive) due to heat
protection m ode.
Illuminates w hen 4W D system requires service.Please bring your
vehicle to your localauthorized dealer for service.
4WD system messages in Message Center (if equipped)
SERVICE 4WD: D isplayed w hen 4W D system requires service.Please
bring your vehicle to your localauthorized dealer for service.
4WD LOCKED TEMPORARILY: D isplayed w hen 4W D system is
locked (i.e.perm anent four w heeldrive) due to heat protection m ode.
4WD DISABLED TEMPORARILY: D isplayed w hen 4W D system is
disengaged (i.e.tw o w heeldrive) due to heat protection m ode.
4WD AUTO RESTORED: D isplayed w hen norm al4W D system
function is restored w hen heat protection m ode is exited.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
192
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles
4W D vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand,snow,m ud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are som ew hat
different from conventionalvehicles,both on and offthe road.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from som e other vehicles.Your
vehicle m ay be higher to allow it to travelover rough terrain w ithout
getting hung up or dam aging underbody com ponents.
The differences that m ake your vehicle so versatile also m ake it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
M aintain steering w heelcontrolat alltim es,especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering w heel
m otion,m ake sure you grip the steering w heelfrom the outside.D o not
grip the spokes.
D rive cautiously to avoid vehicle dam age from concealed objects such as
rocks and stum ps.
You should either know the terrain or exam ine m aps ofthe area before
driving.M ap out your route before driving in the area.To m aintain
steering and braking controlofyour vehicle,you m ust have allfour
w heels on the ground and they m ust be rolling,not sliding or spinning.
Basic operating principles
D rive slow er in strong crossw inds w hich can affect the norm alsteering
characteristics ofyour vehicle.
Be extrem ely carefulw hen driving on pavem ent m ade slippery by
loose sand,w ater,gravel,snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
Ifyour vehicle goes offthe edge ofthe pavem ent,slow dow n,but
avoid severe brake application,ease the vehicle back onto the
pavem ent only after reducing your speed.D o not turn the steering
w heeltoo sharply w hile returning to the road surface.
It m ay be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder ofthe road and slow
dow n gradually before returning to the pavem ent.You m ay lose
controlifyou do not slow dow n or ifyou turn the steering w heeltoo
sharply or abruptly.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
193
It often m ay be less risky to strike sm allobjects,such as highw ay
reflectors,w ith m inor dam age to your vehicle rather than attem pt a
sudden return to the pavem ent w hich could cause the vehicle to slide
sidew ays out ofcontrolor rollover.Rem em ber,your safety and the
safety ofothers should be your prim ary concern.
injury and death.
If your vehicle gets stuck
Ifyour vehicle gets stuck in m ud or snow it m ay be rocked out by
shifting betw een forw ard and reverse gears,stopping betw een shifts,in a
steady pattern.Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a fewminutes or damage
to the transmission andtires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
See your authorized dealer.
D o not spin the w heels at over 35 m ph (56 km /h).The tires m ay
failand injure a passenger or bystander.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
194
Emergency maneuvers
In an unavoidable em ergency situation w here a sudden sharp turn
m ust be m ade,rem em ber to avoid over-drivingyour vehicle,i.e.,
turn the steering w heelonly as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the em ergency.E xcessive steering w illresult in less vehicle control,
not m ore.A dditionally,sm ooth variations ofthe accelerator and/or
brake pedalpressure should be utilized ifchanges in vehicle speed are
called for.Avoid abrupt steering,acceleration or braking w hich could
result in an increased risk ofloss ofvehicle control,vehicle rollover
and/or personalinjury.U se allavailable road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction oftravel.
In the event ofan em ergency stop,avoid skidding the tires and do not
attem pt any sharp steering w heelm ovem ents.
injury and death.
Ifthe vehicle goes from one type ofsurface to another (i.e.,from
concrete to gravel) there w illbe a change in the w ay the vehicle
responds to a m aneuver (steering,acceleration or braking).A gain,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
W hen driving over sand,try to keep allfour w heels on the m ost solid
area ofthe trail.Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a low er
gear and drive steadily through the terrain.A pply the accelerator slow ly
and avoid spinning the w heels.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle m om entum can w ork against you
and cause the vehicle to becom e stuck to the point that assistance m ay
be required from another vehicle.Rem em ber,you m ay be able to back
out the w ay you cam e ifyou proceed w ith caution.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
195
Mud and water
Ifyou m ust drive through high
w ater,drive slow ly.Traction or
brake capability m ay be lim ited.
W hen driving through w ater,
determ ine the depth;avoid w ater
higher than the bottom ofthe hubs
(ifpossible) and proceed slow ly.If
the ignition system gets w et,the
vehicle m ay stall.
O nce through w ater,alw ays try the brakes.W et brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes.D rying can be im proved by m oving
your vehicle slow ly w hile applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious ofsudden changes in vehicle speed or direction w hen you
are driving in m ud.E ven 4W D vehicles can lose traction in slick m ud.A s
w hen you are driving over sand,apply the accelerator slow ly and avoid
spinning your w heels.Ifthe vehicle does slide,steer in the direction of
the slide untilyou regain controlofthe vehicle.
Ifthe transm ission,transfer case or front axle are subm erged in w ater,
their fluids should be checked and changed,ifnecessary.
Drivingthrough deepwater may damage the transmission.
Ifthe front or rear axle is subm erged in w ater,the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
A fter driving through m ud,clean offresidue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires.E xcess m ud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
im balance that could dam age drive com ponents.
Tread Lightlyis an educational
program designed to increase public
aw areness ofland-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
w ilderness areas.Ford M otor
Com pany joins the U .S.Forest Service and the Bureau ofLand
M anagem ent in encouraging you to help preserve our nationalforest and
other public and private lands by treading lightly.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
196
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
A lthough naturalobstacles m ay m ake it necessary to traveldiagonally up
or dow n a hillor steep incline,you should alw ays try to drive straight up
or straight dow n.Avoiddrivingcrosswise or turningon steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction,slipping sidew ays and
possibly rolling over.W henever driving on a hill,determ ine beforehand
the route you w illuse.D o not drive over the crest ofa hillw ithout
seeing w hat conditions are on the other side.D o not drive in reverse
over a hillw ithout the aid ofan observer.
W hen clim bing a steep slope or hill,
start in a low er gear rather than
dow nshifting to a low er gear from a
higher gear once the ascent has
started.This reduces strain on the
engine and the possibility ofstalling.
Ifyou do stallout,D o not try to
turnaround because you m ight roll
over.It is better to back dow n to a
safe location.
A pply just enough pow er to the w heels to clim b the hill.Too m uch
pow er w illcause the tires to slip,spin or lose traction,resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
D escend a hillin the sam e gear you
w ould use to clim b up the hillto
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating.D o not
descend in neutral;instead,
disengage overdrive or m anually
shift to a low er gear.W hen
descending a steep hill,avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control.W hen you brake hard,
the front w heels cant turn and if
they arent turning,you w ont be
able to steer.The front w heels have to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle.Rapid pum ping ofthe brake pedalw illhelp you slow the vehicle
and stillm aintain steering control.
Ifyour vehicle has anti-lock brakes,apply the brakes steadily.D o not
pum pthe brakes.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
197
Driving on snow and ice
4W D vehicles have advantages over 2W D vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide w hile driving on snow y or icy roads,turn the
steering w heelin the direction ofthe slide untilyou regain control.
Avoid sudden applications ofpow er and quick changes ofdirection on
snow and ice.A pply the accelerator slow ly and steadily w hen starting
from a fullstop.
Avoid sudden braking as w ell.A lthough a 4W D vehicle m ay accelerate
better than a tw o-w heeldrive vehicle in snow and ice,it w ont stop any
faster,because as in other vehicles,braking occurs at allfour w heels.D o
not becom e overconfident as to road conditions.
M ake sure you allow sufficient distance betw een you and other vehicles
for stopping.D rive slow er than usualand consider using one ofthe low er
gears.In em ergency stopping situations,avoid locking ofthe w heels.U se
a squeezetechnique,push on the brake pedalw ith a steadily increasing
force w hich allow s the w heels to brake yet continue to rollso that you
m ay steer in the direction you w ant to travel.Ifyou lock the w heels,
release the brake pedaland repeat the squeeze technique.Since your
vehicle is equipped w ith a Four W heelA nti-Lock Brake System (A BS),
apply the brake steadily.D o not pum pthe brakes.Refer to the Brakes
section ofthis chapter for additionalinform ation on the operation ofthe
anti-lock brake system .
4W D vehicles should be driven w ith traction devices as referred to in
Usi ng snow ti res and tracti on devi ces in the Ti res, Wheels and
Loadi ng chapter.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering system s on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable perform ance w hether loaded or em pty
and durable load carrying capability.For this reason,Ford M otor
Com pany strongly recom m ends that you do not m ake m odifications such
as adding or rem oving parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacem ent parts not equivalent to the originalfactory equipm ent.
A ny m odifications to a vehicle that raise the center ofgravity can m ake
it m ore likely the vehicle w illrollover as a result ofa loss ofcontrol.
Ford M otor Com pany recom m ends that caution be used w ith any vehicle
equipped w ith a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
198
Failure to m aintain your vehicle properly m ay void the w arranty,increase
your repair cost,reduce vehicle perform ance and operationalcapabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety.Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis com ponents is recom m ended ifthe vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Ifdriving through deep or standing
w ater is unavoidable,proceed very
slow ly especially w hen the depth is
not know n.N ever drive through
w ater that is higher than the bottom
ofthe w heelrim s (for cars) or the
bottom ofthe hubs (for trucks).
W hen driving through w ater,traction or brake capability m ay be lim ited.
A lso,w ater m ay enter your engines air intake and severely dam age your
engine or your vehicle m ay stall.Drivingthrough deepwater where
the transmission vent tube is submergedmay allowwater into the
transmission andcause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by movingyour
vehicle slowly while applyinglight pressure on the brake pedal.
W et brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Driving
199
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern,Ford M otor Com pany
offers a com plim entary roadside assistance program .This program is
separate from the N ew Vehicle Lim ited W arranty.The service is available:
24hours,seven days a w eek
for the N ew Vehicle Lim ited W arranty period ofthree years or 36,000
m iles (60,000 km ),w hichever occurs first on Ford and M ercury vehicles,
and four years or 50,000 m iles (80,000 km ) on Lincoln vehicles.
Roadside assistance w illcover:
a flat tire change w ith a good spare (except Ford G T w hich has a tire
inflation kit)
battery jum p start
lock-out assistance (key replacem ent cost is the custom ers responsibility)
fueldelivery Independent Service Contractors,ifnot prohibited by
state,localor m unicipallaw shalldeliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5 gallons (18.9L) ofdieselfuelto a disabled vehicle.
w inch out available w ithin 100 feet (30.5 m eters) ofa paved or
county m aintained road,no recoveries.
tow ing Ford/M ercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle tow ed to an authorized
dealer w ithin 35 m iles (56.3 km ) ofthe disablem ent location or to the
nearest authorized dealer.Ifa m em ber requests to be tow ed to an
authorized dealer m ore than 35 m iles (56.3 km ) from the disablem ent
location,the m em ber shallbe responsible for any m ileage costs in
excess of35 m iles (56.3 km ).
Trailers shallbe covered up to $100 ifthe disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer.Ifthe trailer is disabled,
but the tow ing vehicle is operational,the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for
information on:
coverage period
exact fuelam ounts
tow ing ofyour disabled vehicle
em ergency travelexpense reim bursem ent
travelplanning benefits
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
200
Using roadside assistance
Com plete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
w allet for quick reference.In the U nited States,this card is found in the
O w ner G uide portfolio in the glove com partm ent.In Canada,the card is
found in the Owner Informati on Gui de in the glove com partm ent.
U .S.Ford or M ercury vehicle custom ers w ho require roadside assistance,
call18002413673;Lincoln vehicle custom ers call18005214140.
Canadian custom ers w ho require roadside assistance,call
18006652006.
Ifyou need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself,Ford M otor
Com pany w illreim burse a reasonable am ount.To obtain reim bursem ent
inform ation,U .S.Ford or M ercury vehicles custom ers call
18002413673;Lincoln vehicle custom ers call18005214140.
Canadian custom ers w ho need to obtain reim bursem ent inform ation,call
18006652006.
Roadside coverage beyond basic warranty
In the U nited States,you m ay purchase additionalroadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford A uto Club by contacting
your authorized dealer.
Sim ilarly in Canada,for uninterrupted Roadside A ssistance coverage,you
m ay purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic W arrantys Roadside
A ssistance expiring.For m ore inform ation and enrollm ent,contact
18772942582 or visit our w ebsite at w w w.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher is located on the
instrum ent panelby the radio.The
hazard flashers w illoperate w hen
the ignition is in any position or if
the key is not in the ignition.
Push in the flasher controland all
front and rear direction signals w ill
flash.Press the flasher controlagain to turn them off.U se it w hen your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other m otorists.
Note: W ith extended use,the flasher m ay run dow n your battery.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
201
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
This device stops the electric fuelpum p from sending fuelto the engine
w hen your vehicle has had a substantialjolt.
A fter an accident,ifthe engine cranks but does not start,this sw itch
m ay have been activated.
This sw itch is located in the front
passengers footw ell,behind a
flip-up cover,by the kick panel
access cover.
To reset the sw itch:
1.Turn the ignition O FF.
2.Check the fuelsystem for leaks.
3.Ifno leaks are apparent,reset the
sw itch by pushing in on the reset
button.
4.Turn the ignition O N .
5.W ait a few seconds and return
the key to O FF.
6.M ake another check for leaks.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
Ifelectricalcom ponents in the
vehicle are not w orking,a fuse m ay
have blow n.Blow n fuses are
identified by a broken w ire w ithin
the fuse.Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
com ponents.
Note: A lw ays replace a fuse w ith one that has the specified am perage
rating.U sing a fuse w ith a higher am perage rating can cause severe w ire
dam age and could start a fire.
15
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
202
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A G rey G rey
3A Violet Violet
4A Pink Pink
5A Tan Tan
7.5A Brow n Brow n
10A Red Red
15A Blue Blue
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A N atural N atural
30A G reen G reen G reen Pink Pink
40A O range G reen G reen
50A Red Red Red
60A Blue Yellow
70A Tan Brow n
80A N atural Black
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
203
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panelis located on the
right-hand side ofthe center
console,by the instrum ent panel.
Rem ove the panelcover to access
the fuses.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
204
The fuses are coded as follow s:
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
1 15A * Trailer tow park lam ps
2 N ot used
3 15A * Front and rear park lam ps
4 10A * Ignition sw itch
5 2A * Pow ertrain ControlM odule (PCM
relay),Fuelpum p relay,M ain fan
relay,H igh/Low speed fan relay 2,
PATS m odule
6 15A * Center H igh-M ounted Stop Lam p
(CH M SL),Stop lam ps,PCM ,A nti-lock
Brake System (A BS),Speed control,
Brake O n-O ffsw itch
7 10A * Instrum ent cluster,D iagnostic
connector,Pow er m irror sw itch,
Radio
8 N ot used
9 30A ** Pow er door locks,Pow er seats
10 15A * H eated m irrors
11 15A * Sunroof,E lectrochrom atic m irror
12 5A * Radio
13 N ot used
14 N ot used
15 30A ** Pow er w indow s
16 15A * Subw oofer
17 15A * Low beam s
18 10A * 4W D
19 N ot used
20 15A * H orn
21 10A * Rear w iper m otor,Rear w iper w asher
22 10A * Instrum ent cluster
23 N ot used
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
205
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
24 20A * Cigar lighter
25 20A * Front w iper m otor,Front w iper
w asher
26 5A * Clim ate controlsystem m ode sw itch
27 5A * Canister vent,Speed controlcancel
sw itch
28 10A * Instrum ent cluster
29 10A * Reverse park aid
30 N ot used
31 N ot used
32 10A * Brake-Transm ission shift lock
33 15A * A ir bag m odule,Passenger A ir bag
D eactivation (PA D ) indicator lam p,
O ccupant Classification Sensor (O CS)
34 5A * A BS m odule,E vac and Fill,Speed
control
35 5A * H eated seats m odule,4W D
* M inifuse ** Cartridge fuse
Power distribution box
The pow er distribution box is
located in the engine com partm ent.
The pow er distribution box contains
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicles m ain electricalsystem s
from overloads.
A lw ays disconnect the battery before servicing high current
fuses.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
206
To reduce risk ofelectricalshock,alw ays replace the cover to
the Pow er D istribution Box before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
Ifthe battery has been disconnected and reconnected,refer to the
Battery section ofthe Mai ntenance and Speci fi cati ons chapter.
The high-current fuses are coded as follow s.
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
1 N ot used
2 25A * H eadlam p pow er
3 25A * H igh beam s,Turn signals,Interior
lam ps,H eadlam p pow er
4 5A * K eep A live Pow er (K A PW R)
5 15A * H eated E xhaust G as O xygen (H E G O )
sensors
6 20A * Fuelpum p
7 40A ** RU N /A CC relay - E lectrochrom atic
m irror,Cigar lighter,Front and rear
w ipers
8 30A ** Pow ertrain ControlM odule (PCM ),
Injectors and coil
9 15A * A lternator
10 30A * H eated seats
11 10A * PCM
12 20A * Pow er point
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
207
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
13 20A * Fog lam ps
14 15A * A /C clutch,A /C relay
15
30A * A nti-lock Brake System (A BS)
solenoid
16 25A * I/P fuse panel(RU N /STA RT)
17 50A ** Ignition (m ain)
18 40A ** Blow er m otor
19 40A ** A ccessory delay relay - Subw oofer
and 4W D ,Low beam
20 60A ** A BS
21 40A ** H orn,CH M SL,Cluster,Pow er locks
and pow er seats
22 40A ** (I4) Cooling fan
50A ** (V6)
23 40A ** Rear defroster,Park lam ps relay
24 40A ** (I4) H igh/Low speed fan
50A ** (V6)
25 Shunt
R2 PCM relay
R3 Fuelpum p relay
R4 Cooling fan relay
R5 H igh/Low speed fan relay 1
R6 Blow er m otor relay
R7 Starter relay
R8 H igh/Low speed fan relay 2
R9 Fog lam ps relay
R10 A /C relay
D 1 N ot used
D 2 A /C diode
* M inifuse ** Cartridge fuse
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
208
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
Ifyou get a flat tire w hile driving:
do not brake heavily.
gradually decrease the vehicles speed.
hold the steering w heelfirm ly.
slow ly m ove to a safe place on the side ofthe road.
Your vehicle m ay be equipped w ith a conventionalspare tire that is
different in one or m ore ofthe follow ing:type,brand,size,speed rating
and tread design.Ifthis is the case,this dissim ilar spare tire is stillrated
for your vehicle loads (G AW R and G VW R).Your vehicle m ay be equipped
w ith a spare w heelthat m ay not m atch the road w heels and is not
equipped w ith a Tire Pressure M onitor System (TPM S) sensor.
The use oftire sealants m ay dam age your tires.The use oftire
sealants m ay also dam age your Tire Pressure M onitoring System
and should not be used.
Refer to Ti re Pressure Moni tori ng System (TPMS) in the Ti re,
Wheels and Loadi ng chapter for im portant inform ation.Ifthe
tire pressure m onitor sensor becom es dam aged,it w illno longer
function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased
risk ofloss ofvehicle control,injury or death.
Ifyou have a dissim ilar spare tire/w heel,then it is intended for
tem porary use only.This m eans that ifyou need to use it,you should
replace it as soon as possible w ith a road tire/w heelthat is the sam e size
and type as the road tires and w heels that w ere originally provided by
Ford.Ifthe dissim ilar spare tire or w heelis dam aged,it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
209
A dissim ilar spare tire/w heelis defined as a spare tire and/or w heelthat
is different in brand,size or appearance from the road tires and w heels
and can be one ofthree types:
1.T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins w ith the letter Tfor tire
size and m ay have Tem porary U se O nlym olded in the sidew all
2.Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a labelon the w heelthat states:TH IS TIRE A N D W H E E L FO R
TE M PO RA RY U SE O N LY
W hen driving w ith one ofthe dissim ilar spare tires listed above,do not:
E xceed 50 m ph (80 km /h)
Load the vehicle beyond m axim um vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Com pliance Label
Tow a trailer
U se snow chains on the end ofthe vehicle w ith the dissim ilar spare tire
U se m ore than one dissim ilar spare tire at a tim e
U se com m ercialcar w ashing equipm ent
Try to repair the dissim ilar spare tire
U se ofone ofthe dissim ilar spare tires listed above at any one w heel
location can lead to im pairm ent ofthe follow ing:
H andling,stability and braking perform ance
Com fort and noise
G round clearance and parking at curbs
W inter w eather driving capability
W et w eather driving capability
For vehicles equipped w ith 4W D ,it is not recom m ended that the vehicle
be operated in 4W D m odes w ith a tem porary em ergency spare tire.If
4W D operation is necessary,do not operate above speeds of10 m ph (16
km /h) or for distances above 50 m iles (80 km ).
3.Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
W hen driving w ith the full-size dissim ilar spare tire/w heel,do not:
E xceed 70 m ph (113 km /h)
U se m ore than one dissim ilar spare tire/w heelat a tim e
U se com m ercialcar w ashing equipm ent
U se snow chains on the end ofthe vehicle w ith the dissim ilar spare
tire/w heel
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
210
The usage ofa full-size dissim ilar spare tire/w heelcan lead to
im pairm ent ofthe follow ing:
H andling,stability and braking perform ance
Com fort and noise
G round clearance and parking at curbs
W inter w eather driving capability
W et w eather driving capability
A ll-W heeldriving capability (ifapplicable)
Load leveling adjustm ent (ifapplicable)
W hen driving w ith the full-size dissim ilar spare tire/w heeladditional
caution should be given to:
Tow ing a trailer
D riving vehicles equipped w ith a cam per body
D riving vehicles w ith a load on the cargo rack
D rive cautiously w hen using a full-size dissim ilar spare tire/w heeland
seek service as soon as possible.
Full-size Matching Spare Tire/Wheel Information
This spare tire/w heelw illm atch the road tire/w heel.W hen driving w ith
the fullsize m atching spare tire/w heel,do not exceed 70 m ph (113
km /h).It is intended for tem porary use only.This m eans ifyou need to
use it,you should replace it as soon as possible.
Tire change procedure
Note: The tire pressure m onitoring system (TPM S) indicator light w ill
illum inate w hen the spare is in use.To restore the fullfunctionality of
the TPM S system ,allroad w heels equipped w ith the tire pressure
m onitoring sensors m ust be m ounted on the vehicle.
H ave a flat tire serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent
dam age to the TPM S sensor,refer to Ti re Pressure Moni tori ng System
(TPMS) in the Ti res, Wheels, and Loadi ng chapter.Replace the spare
tire w ith a road tire as soon as possible.D uring repairing or replacing of
the flat tire,have the authorized dealer inspect the TPM S sensor for
dam age.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
211
W hen one ofthe front w heels is offthe ground,the transm ission
alone w illnot prevent the vehicle from m oving or slipping offthe
jack,even ifthe vehicle is in P (Park) (autom atic transaxle) or R
(Reverse) (m anualtransaxle).
To help prevent the vehicle from m oving w hen you change a tire,
be sure the parking brake is set,then block (in both directions)
the w heelthat is diagonally opposite (other side and end ofthe
vehicle) to the tire being changed.
Ifthe vehicle slips offthe jack,you or som eone else could be
seriously injured.
1.Park on a levelsurface,activate
hazard flashers and place gearshift
lever in P (Park) (autom atic
transm ission) or R (Reverse)
(m anualtransm ission).
2.Set the parking brake and turn
engine off.
3.Block the diagonally opposite
w heel.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
212
Removing the jack and tools
Non-cargo management system
(if equipped):The jack and tools
are located under the carpeted
hardboard.
Pullback the carpet aw ay from the lift gate,and rem ove the hardboard
cover.
U nbuckle the strap and rem ove the
jack and tools by pulling the right
side up first.Rem ove the tools from
the jack in order to rem ove the
spare tire from under the vehicle.
Note: For som e non-cargo m anagem ent system vehicles,the jack and
tools are located in the right rear ofthe cargo area behind an access
panel.
Cargo management system(if
equipped):The jack and tools are
located in the right rear ofthe cargo
area behind an access panel.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
213
To rem ove jack from vehicle:
1.Release the thum bscrew on the
bracket.
2.Release the retention clip on the
upper part ofthe jack bracket.
3.D islodge the jack from the
bracket and carefully guide jack
dow n and out through trim opening,
upper end out first.
Rem ove the lug w rench from the
jack in order to rem ove the spare
tire from under the vehicle.
Removing the spare tire or spare tire and tether (if equipped)
1.Insert the lug w rench through the
access hole in the rear bum per.
2.Turn the handle counterclockw ise
and low er the spare tire untilit can
be slid rearw ard and the cable is
slack.
3.Slide the retainer through the
center ofthe w heel.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
214
If equippedwith a tether, performthe followingadditional steps:
4.Lift the spare tire on end to
access tether attachm ent (1).
5.U se the lug w rench to rem ove the
lug nut from the spare tire tether.
6.Ifnot replacing the spare or flat
tire to the underbody storage area,
raise w inch up into the installed
position.
7.U se the attached Velcro strap (2)
to tie the tether end to the w inch
actuator shaft (ifequipped).
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
215
Changing the flat tire
8.Loosen each w heellug nut
one-halfturn counterclockw ise but
do not rem ove them untilthe w heel
is raised offthe ground.
Before placing the jack under the vehicle,N O TE the jack locations:
Front
Rear
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
216
9.Low er the jack from its stored
height to fit under the jacking
notches.Position the jack according
to the follow ing guides and turn the
jack handle clockw ise untilthe tire
is a m axim um of1 inch (25 m m ) off
the ground.
Never use the differentials as a
jackingpoint.
To lessen the risk of
personalinjury,do not put
any part ofyour body under the
vehicle w hile changing a tire.D o
not start the engine w hen your
vehicle is on the jack.The jack is
only m eant for changing the tire.
10.Rem ove the lug nuts w ith the lug nut w rench.
11.Replace the flat tire w ith the spare tire,m aking sure the valve stem
is facing outw ard.Reinstalllug nuts untilthe w heelis snug against the
hub.D o not fully tighten the lug nuts untilthe w heelhas been low ered.
12.Low er the w heelby turning the jack handle counterclockw ise.
13.Rem ove the jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts in the order
show n.Refer to Wheel lug nut
torque speci fi cati ons later in this
chapter for the proper lug nut
torque specification.
1
4 3
2 5
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
217
Cargo management system(if
equipped):
Reclip the tools onto the jack.
Reinstallthe jack and tools in the cargo area.To replace the jack in the
vehicle,
guide the jack bottom first in the
trim opening and position in the
bracket (3),
secure the retention clip on the
upper part ofthe jack (2),and
close the thum bscrew (1).
M ake sure the jack is fastened so it
does not rattle w hen you drive.
Non-cargo management system
(if equipped):
Reclip the tools onto the jack
m aking sure that the tools are
fully contained by the clips as
show n.
Reinstallthe jack in the pocket
w ith the left side first,then snap
the right side dow n.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
218
E nsure that the hold-strap contains the jack and tools before snapping
the buckle.
E nsure that the jack and tools are oriented as illustrated.
Stowing the flat/spare tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stow age instructions m ay result in
failure ofcable or loss ofspare tire.
If you are stowinga tire that requires reattachingit to the
vehicle with a tether, performthese steps first, then proceedwith
the steps following.
1.Place tire on end w ith valve stem
facing rearw ard,aw ay from vehicle.
2.Place tether into bolt holes in
w heeland attach lug nut using lug
w rench.
3.Lay the tire on the ground w ith the valve stem facing dow n.Ifyour
vehicle is equipped w ith alum inum w heels,rem ove the w heelornam ent.
4.Slide the w heelpartially under the vehicle and installthe retainer
through the center ofthe w heel.
5.Turn the jack handle clockw ise untilthe tire is raised to its original
position underneath the vehicle.The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly as the tire contacts the fram e.The spare tire
carrier w illratchet w hen the tire is in the fully stow ed position.The
spare tire carrier has a built-in ratchet feature that w illnot allow you to
overtighten.Ifthe spare tire carrier ratchets w ith very little effort,take
the vehicle to your authorized dealer for assistance at your earliest
convenience.If your vehicle is equippedwith a trailer hitch, guide
the tire with one hand; keepthe rear of the tire tilteddown until
the tire clears the bumper.
6.Check that the tire lies flat against the fram e assem bly.Push against
the tire to m ake sure it is tightly seated under the vehicle.Loosen and
retighten,ifnecessary.Failure to properly stow the spare tire m ay result
in failure ofthe w inch cable and loss ofthe spare tire.(Make sure that
the tire does not contact the bumper.)
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
219
7.Repeat this tightness check procedure w hen servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six m onths,per scheduled mai ntenance i nformati on),
or at any tim e that the spare tire is disturbed through service ofother
com ponents.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 m iles (800 km )
after any w heeldisturbance (tire rotation,changing a flat tire,w heel
rem oval,etc.).
Bolt size Wheel lugnut torque*
lb.ft. Nm
M 12 x 1.5 100 135
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free ofdirt and
rust.U se only Ford recom m ended replacem ent fasteners.
W hen a w heelis installed,alw ays rem ove any corrosion,dirt or
foreign m aterials present on the m ounting surfaces ofthe w heel
or the surface ofthe w heelhub,brake drum or brake disc that
contacts the w heel.E nsure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to
the hub are secured so they do not interfere w ith the m ounting
surfaces ofthe w heel.Installing w heels w ithout correct m etal-to-m etal
contact at the w heelm ounting surfaces can cause the w heelnuts to
loosen and the w heelto com e offw hile the vehicle is in m otion,
resulting in loss ofcontrol.
JUMP STARTING
The gases around the battery can explode ifexposed to flam es,
sparks,or lit cigarettes.A n explosion could result in injury or
vehicle dam age.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid w hich can burn skin,eyes and
clothing,ifcontacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start capability; doingso may
damage the catalytic converter.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
220
Preparing your vehicle
W hen the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed,the
transm ission m ust relearn its shift strategy.A s a result,the transm ission
m ay have firm and/or soft shifts.This operation is considered norm aland
w illnot affect function or durability ofthe transm ission.O ver tim e,the
adaptive learning process w illfully update transm ission operation.
1.Use only a 12volt supply to start your vehicle.
2.D o not disconnect the battery ofthe disabled vehicle as this could
dam age the vehicles electricalsystem .
3.Park the booster vehicle close to the hood ofthe disabled vehicle
m aking sure the tw o vehicles do not touch.Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear ofthe engine cooling fan and other m oving
parts.
4.Check allbattery term inals and rem ove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables.E nsure that vent caps are tight and level.
5.Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical
surges.Turn allother accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
1.Connect the positive (+) jum per cable to the positive (+) term inalof
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations,li ghtni ng bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
221
2.Connect the other end ofthe positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
term inalofthe assisting battery.
3.Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) term inalofthe
assisting battery.
+
+
+
+
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
222
4.M ake the finalconnection ofthe negative (-) cable to an exposed
m etalpart ofthe stalled vehicles engine,aw ay from the battery and the
carburetor/fuelinjection system .Do not use fuellines,engine rocker
covers or the intake m anifold as groundi ng points.
D o not connect the end ofthe second cable to the negative (-)
term inalofthe battery to be jum ped.A spark m ay cause an
explosion ofthe gases that surround the battery.
5.E nsure that the cables are clear offan blades,belts,m oving parts of
both engines,or any fueldelivery system parts.
Jump starting
1.Start the engine ofthe booster vehicle and run the engine at
m oderately increased speed.
2.Start the engine ofthe disabled vehicle.
3.O nce the disabled vehicle has been started,run both engines for an
additionalthree m inutes before disconnecting the jum per cables.
+
+
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
223
Removing the jumper cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1.Rem ove the jum per cable from the ground m etalsurface.
Note: In the illustrations,li ghtni ng bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
2.Rem ove the jum per cable on the negative (-) connection ofthe
booster vehicles battery.
+
+
+
+
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
224
3.Rem ove the jum per cable from the positive (+) term inalofthe booster
vehicles battery.
4.Rem ove the jum per cable from the positive (+) term inalofthe
disabled vehicles battery.
A fter the disabled vehicle has been started and the jum per cables
rem oved,allow it to idle for severalm inutes so the engine com puter can
relearn its idle conditions.
+
+
+
+
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
225
WRECKER TOWING
Ifyou need to have your vehicle tow ed,contact a professionaltow ing
service or,ifyou are a m em ber ofa roadside assistance program ,your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recom m ended that your vehicle be tow ed w ith a w heellift and
dollies or flatbed equipm ent.D o not tow w ith a slingbelt.Ford M otor
Com pany has not approved a slingbelt tow ing procedure.
O n FW D vehicles,ifyour vehicle is to be tow ed from the front,ensure
proper w heellift equipm ent is used to raise the front w heels offthe
ground.The rear w heels can be left on the ground w hen tow ed in this
fashion.
Ifyour vehicle is to be tow ed from the rear using w heellift equipm ent,it
is recom m ended that the front w heels (drive w heels) be placed on a
dolly to prevent dam age to the autom atic transaxle.
O n 4W D vehicles,it is requiredthat your vehicle be tow ed w ith a w heel
lift and dollies or flatbed equipm ent w ith allthe w heels offthe ground to
prevent dam age to the autom atic transaxle,4W D system or vehicle.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
226
If the vehicle is towedby other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
In case ofa roadside em ergency w ith a disabled vehicle (w ithout access
to w heeldollies,car hauling trailer,or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless oftransm ission pow ertrain configuration) can be flat
tow ed (allw heels on the ground) under the follow ing conditions:
Place the transm ission in N (N eutral).
M axim um distance is 50 m iles (80 km ).
M axim um speed is not to exceed 35 m ph (56 km /h).
Ford M otor Com pany produces a tow ing m anualfor allauthorized tow
truck operators.H ave your tow truck operator refer to this m anualfor
proper hook-up and tow ing procedures for your vehicle.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
227
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
You m ust take your Ford vehicle to an authorized dealer for w arranty
repairs.W hile any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line w ill
provide w arranty service,w e recom m end you return to your selling
authorized dealer w ho w ants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain w arranty repairs require specialtraining and/or
equipm ent,so not allauthorized dealers are authorized to perform all
w arranty repairs.This m eans that,depending on the w arranty repair
needed,you m ay have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable tim e m ust be allow ed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer.Repairs w illbe m ade using Ford or
M otorcraft parts,or rem anufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
Ifyou have questions or concerns,or are unsatisfied w ith the service you
are receiving,follow these steps:
1.Contact your Sales Representative or Service A dvisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2.Ifyour inquiry or concern rem ains unresolved,contact the Sales
M anager,Service M anager or Custom er Relations M anager.
3.Ifyou require assistance or clarification on Ford M otor Com pany
policies or procedures,please contact the Ford Custom er Relationship
Center at 1-800-392-3673 (FO RD ).
Away from home
Ifyou ow n a Ford or M ercury vehicle and are aw ay from hom e w hen
your vehicle needs service,or ifyou need m ore help than the authorized
dealer could provide,after follow ing the steps described above,contact
the Ford Custom er Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to
help you.
In the U nited States:
Ford M otor Com pany
Custom er Relationship Center
P.O .Box 6248
D earborn,M I48121
1-800-392-3673 (FO RD )
(TD D for the hearing im paired:1-800-232-5952)
w w w.custom ersaskford.com
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
228
In Canada:
Custom er Relationship Centre
Ford M otor Com pany ofCanada,Lim ited
P.O .Box 2000
O akville,O ntario L6J 5E 4
1-800-565-3673 (FO RD )
w w w.ford.ca
Ifyou ow n a Lincoln vehicle and are aw ay from hom e w hen your vehicle
needs service,or ifyou need m ore help than the authorized dealer could
provide,after follow ing the steps described above,contact the Ford
Custom er Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to help you.
In the U nited States:
Custom er Relationship Center
P.O .Box 6248
D earborn,M I48121
1-800-521-4140
(TD D for the hearing im paired:1-800-232-5952)
w w w.custom ersaskford.com
In Canada:
Lincoln Centre
Ford M otor Com pany ofCanada,Lim ited
P.O .Box 2000
O akville,O ntario L6J 5E 4
1-800-387-9333
w w w.lincolncanada.com
In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle,please have the
follow ing inform ation available w hen contacting the Lincoln Centre:
Your telephone num ber (hom e and business)
The nam e ofthe authorized dealer and the city w here the authorized
dealer is located
The year and m ake ofyour vehicle
The date ofvehicle purchase
The current odom eter reading
The vehicle identification num ber (VIN )
Additional Assistance
Ifyou stillhave a com plaint involving a w arranty dispute,you m ay w ish
to contact the D ispute Settlem ent Board (U .S.).
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
229
In som e states (in the U .S.) you m ust directly notify Ford in w riting
before pursuing rem edies under your states w arranty law s.Ford is also
allow ed a finalrepair attem pt in som e states.
In the U nited States,a w arranty dispute m ust be subm itted to the
D ispute Settlem ent Board before taking action under the M agnuson-M oss
W arranty A ct,or to the extent allow ed by state law,before pursuing
replacem ent or repurchase rem edies provided by certain state law s.This
dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights w hich are independent ofthe
M agnuson-M oss W arranty A ct or state replacem ent or repurchase law s.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California CivilCode Section 1793.2(d) requires that,ifa m anufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a m otor vehicle to conform to the
vehicles applicable express w arranty after a reasonable num ber of
attem pts,the m anufacturer shallbe required to either replace the
vehicle w ith one substantially identicalor repurchase the vehicle and
reim burse the buyer in an am ount equalto the actualprice paid or
payable by the consum er (less a reasonable allow ance for consum er
use).The consum er has the right to choose w hether to receive a refund
or replacem ent vehicle.
California CivilCode Section 1793.22(b) presum es that the m anufacturer
has had a reasonable num ber ofattem pts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express w arranties if,w ithin the first 18 m onths ofow nership
ofa new vehicle or the first 18,000 m iles (29,000 km ),w hichever occurs
first:
1.Tw o or m ore repair attem pts are m ade on the sam e non-conform ity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury O R
2.Four or m ore repair attem pts are m ade on the sam e nonconform ity (a
defect or condition that substantially im pairs the use,value or safety of
the vehicle) O R
3.The vehicle is out ofservice for repair ofnonconform ities for a totalof
m ore than 30 calendar days (not necessarily allat one tim e)
In the case of1 or 2 above,the consum er m ust also notify the
m anufacturer ofthe need for the repair ofthe nonconform ity at the
follow ing address:
16800 E xecutive Plaza D rive
M ailD rop 3N E -B
D earborn,M I48126
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
230
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is im portant to Ford M otor Com pany and to your dealer.
E xperience has show n that our custom ers have been very successfulin
achieving satisfaction by follow ing the three-step procedure outlined on
the front page ofthe W arranty G uide.H ow ever,ifyour w arranty concern
has not been resolved using the three-step procedure,you m ay be
eligible to participate in the BBB A U TO LIN E program .
The BBB A U TO LIN E program consists oftw o parts m ediation and
arbitration.Initially,the BBB w illtry to resolve your question or concern
through m ediation.M ediation is a process through w hich a
representative ofthe BBB w illcontact the parties and explore options
for settlem ent ofyour claim .Ifm ediation is not successful,custom ers
w ith eligible claim s m ay participate in the BBB A U TO LIN E arbitration
process.A n arbitration hearing w illbe scheduled so that you can present
your case in an inform alsetting before an im partialperson.The
arbitrator w illconsider the testim ony provided and m ake a decision after
the hearing.You are not bound by the decision but m ay choose to accept
it.Ifyou choose to accept the BBB A U TO LIN E decision then Ford m ust
abide by the accepted decision as w ell.Ifthe arbitrator has decided in
your favor and you accept the decision,the BBB A U TO LIN E program
w illcontact you to ensure that Ford has com plied w ith the decision in a
tim ely m anner.D isputes subm itted to the BBB A U TO LIN E program are
usually decided w ithin forty days after you file your claim w ith the BBB.
To file a claim w ith the BBB A U TO LIN E ,you w illbe asked for your nam e
and address,inform ation about your vehicle,inform ation about your
concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them .
You can get m ore inform ation by calling BBB A U TO LIN E at
18004283718,or w riting to:
BBB A U TO LIN E
4200 W ilson Boulevard,Suite 800
A rlington,Virginia 222031833
Note: Ford M otor Com pany reserves the right to change eligibility
lim itations,m odify procedures,or to discontinue this process at any tim e
w ithout notice and w ithout obligation.
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers.In those cases
w here you continue to feelthat the efforts by Ford ofCanada and the
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
231
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory,Ford ofCanada participates in an im partial
third party m ediation/arbitration program adm inistered by the Canadian
M otor Vehicle A rbitration Plan (CA M VA P).
The CA M VA P program is a straight-forw ard and relatively speedy alternative
to resolve a disagreem ent w hen allother efforts to produce a settlem ent
have failed.This procedure is w ithout cost to you and is designed to
elim inate the need for lengthy and expensive legalproceedings.
In the CA M VA P program ,im partialthird-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at m utually convenient tim es and places in an inform al
environm ent.These im partialarbitrators review the positions ofthe
parties,m ake decisions and,w hen appropriate,render aw ards to resolve
disputes.CA M VA P decisions are fast,fair,and finalas the arbitrators
aw ard is binding both to you and Ford ofCanada.
CA M VA P services are available in allterritories and provinces.For m ore
inform ation,w ithout charge or obligation,callyour CA M VA P Provincial
A dm inistrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get m ore protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford E xtended Service Plan (Ford E SP) coverage.It provides
the follow ing:
Benefits during the w arranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as:reim bursem ent for rentals;coverage for certain
m aintenance and w ear item s).
Protection against covered repair costs after your Bum per-to-Bum per
W arranty expires.
You m ay purchase Ford E SP from any participating authorized dealer.
There are severalplans available in various tim e,distance and deductible
com binations w hich can be tailored to fit your ow n driving needs.Ford
E SP also offers reim bursem ent benefits for tow ing and rentalcoverage.
W hen you buy Ford E SP,you receive Peace-of-M ind protection
throughout the U nited States and Canada,provided by a netw ork of
m ore than 4,600 participating authorized dealers.
Ifyou did not take advantage ofthe Ford E xtended Service Plan at the
tim e ofpurchasing your vehicle,you m ay stillbe eligible.Since this
inform ation is subject to change,please ask your authorized dealer for
com plete details about Ford E xtended Service Plan coverage options,or
visit the Ford E SP w ebsite at w w w.ford-esp.com .
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
232
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country,contact the
appropriate foreign em bassy or consulate.These officials can inform you
oflocalvehicle registration regulations and w here to find unleaded fuel.
Ifyou cannot find unleaded fuelor can only get fuelw ith an anti-knock
index low er than is recom m ended for your vehicle,contact a regional
office or ow ner relations/custom er relationship office.
The use ofleaded fuelin your vehicle w ithout proper conversion m ay
dam age the effectiveness ofyour em ission controlsystem and m ay cause
engine knocking or serious engine dam age.Ford M otor Com pany/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any dam age caused by use ofim proper
fuel.U sing leaded fuelm ay also result in difficulty im porting your vehicle
back into the U .S.
Ifyour vehicle m ust be serviced w hile you are traveling or living in
CentralA m erica,the Caribbean,or the M iddle E ast,contact the nearest
authorized dealer.Ifthe authorized dealer cannot help you,w rite or call:
FO RD M O TO R CO M PA N Y
W O RLD W ID E D IRE CT M A RK E T O PE RATIO N S
1555 Fairlane D rive
Fairlane Business Park #3
A llen Park,M ichigan 48101
U .S.A .
Telephone:(313) 594-4857
FA X :(313) 390-0804
Ifyou are in another foreign country,contact the nearest authorized
dealer.Ifthe authorized dealer em ployees cannot help you,they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
Ifyou buy your vehicle in N orth A m erica and then relocate outside of
the U .S.or Canada,register your vehicle identification num ber (VIN ) and
new address w ith Ford M otor Com pany W orldw ide D irect M arket
O perations.
Customers in the U.S. shouldcall 18003923673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNERS LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,contact H elm ,Incorporated at:
H E LM ,IN CO RPO RATE D
P.O .Box 07150
D etroit,M ichigan 48207
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
233
O r call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
M onday-Friday 8:00 a.m .- 6:00 p.m .E ST
H elm ,Incorporated can also be reached by their w ebsite:
w w w.helm inc.com .
(Items i n thi s catalog may be purchased by credi t card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owners guide
French O w ners G uides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by w riting to Ford M otor Com pany ofCanada,Lim ited,Service
Publications,P.O .Box 1580,Station B,M ississauga,O ntario L4Y 4G 3.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
Ifyou believe that your vehicle has
a defect w hich could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death,you
should im m ediately inform the
N ationalH ighw ay Traffic Safety
A dm inistration (N H TSA ) in addition to notifying Ford M otor Com pany.
IfN H TSA receives sim ilar com plaints,it m ay open an investigation,and
ifit finds that a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles,it m ay order a
recalland rem edy cam paign.H ow ever,N H TSA cannot becom e involved
in individualproblem s betw een you,your dealer,or Ford M otor
Com pany.
To contact N H TSA ,you m ay callthe Vehicle Safety H otline toll-free at
18883274236 (TTY:18004249153);go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or w rite to:
A dm inistrator
N H TSA
400 Seventh Street,SW
W ashington,D .C.20590
You can also obtain other inform ation about m otor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
234
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
W ash your vehicle regularly w ith coolor lukew arm w ater and a neutral
pH sham poo,such as M otorcraft D etailW ash (ZC-3A ),w hich is
available from your authorized dealer.
N ever use strong household detergents or soap,such as dish w ashing or
laundry liquid.These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces.
N ever w ash a vehicle that is hot to the touchor during exposure to
strong,direct sunlight.
A lw ays use a clean sponge or car w ash m itt w ith plenty ofw ater for
best results.
D ry the vehicle w ith a cham ois or soft terry cloth tow elin order to
elim inate w ater spotting.
It is especially im portant to w ash the vehicle regularly during the
w inter m onths,as dirt and road salt are difficult to rem ove and cause
dam age to the vehicle.
Im m ediately rem ove item s such as gasoline,dieselfuel,bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause dam age to the vehicles
paintw ork and trim over tim e.
Rem ove any exterior accessories,such as antennas,before entering a
car w ash.
Suntan lotions andinsect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
WAXING
A pplying M otorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45) to your vehicle every six
m onths w illassist in reducing m inor scratches and paint dam age.
W ash the vehicle first.
D o not use w axes that contain abrasives;use M otorcraft Prem ium
Liquid W ax (ZC-53-A ),w hich is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
D o not allow paint sealant to com e in contact w ith any non-body
(low -gloss black) colored trim ,such as grained door handles,roof
racks,bum pers,side m oldings,m irror housings or the w indshield cow l
area.The paint sealant w illgrayor stain the parts over tim e.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to m atch your
vehicles color.Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the drivers
door jam b) to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
235
Rem ove particles such as bird droppings,tree sap,insect deposits,tar
spots,road salt and industrialfallout before repairing paint chips.
A lw ays read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
A lum inum w heels and w heelcovers are coated w ith a clearcoat paint
finish.In order to m aintain their shine:
Clean w eekly w ith M otorcraft W heeland Tire Cleaner (ZC-37A ),
w hich is available from your authorized dealer.H eavy dirt and brake
dust accum ulation m ay require agitation w ith a sponge.Rinse
thoroughly w ith a strong stream ofw ater.
N ever apply any cleaning chem icalto hot or w arm w heelrim s or
covers.
Som e autom atic car w ashes m ay cause dam age to the finish on your
w heelrim s or covers.Chem ical-strength cleaners,or cleaning
chem icals,in com bination w ith brush agitation to rem ove brake dust
and dirt,could w ear aw ay the clearcoat finish over tim e.
D o not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based w heel
cleaners,steelw ool,fuels or strong household detergent.
To rem ove tar and grease,use M otorcraft Bug and Tar Rem over
(ZC-42),available from your authorized dealer.
ENGINE
E ngines are m ore efficient w hen they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine w arm er than norm al.W hen w ashing:
Take care w hen using a pow er w asher to clean the engine.The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
dam age.
D o not spray a hot engine w ith cold w ater to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine com ponents.
Spray M otorcraft E ngine Sham poo and D egreaser (ZC-20) on allparts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
Cover the highlighted areas to prevent w ater dam age w hen cleaning
the engine.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
236
2.3L I4
3.0L DOHC V6 Duratec Engine
N ever w ash or rinse the engine w hile it is running;w ater in the
running engine m ay cause internaldam age.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
U se only approved products to clean plastic parts.These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
For routine cleaning,use M otorcraft D etailW ash (ZC-3A ).
Iftar or grease spots are present,use M otorcraft Bug and Tar
Rem over (ZC-42).
For plastic headlam p lenses,use M otorcraft U ltra Clear Spray G lass
Cleaner (ZC-23).
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
237
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The w indshield,rear and side w indow s and the w iper blades should be
cleaned regularly.Ifthe w ipers do not w ipe properly,substances on the
vehicles glass or the w iper blades m ay be the cause.These m ay include
hot w ax treatm ents used by com m ercialcar w ashes,w ater repellant
coatings,tree sap,or other organic contam ination;these contam inants
m ay cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades,and streaking and
sm earing ofthe w indshield.To clean these item s,follow these tips:
The w indshield,rear w indow s and side w indow s m ay be cleaned w ith
a non-abrasive cleaner such as M otorcraft U ltra-Clear Spray G lass
Cleaner (ZC-23),available from your authorized dealer.
The w iper blades can be cleaned w ith isopropyl(rubbing) alcoholor
M otorcraft Prem ium W indshield W asher Concentrate (ZC-32A ),
available from your authorized dealer.This w asher fluid contains
specialsolution in addition to alcoholw hich helps to rem ove the hot
w ax deposited on the w iper blade and w indshield from autom ated car
w ash facilities.Be sure to replace w iper blades w hen they appear
w orn or do not function properly.
D o not use abrasives,as they m ay cause scratches.
D o not use fuel,kerosene,or paint thinner to clean any parts.
Do not use sharpobjects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear windowor to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear windowdefrosters heatedgridlines.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrum ent panelw ith a dam p cloth,then w ith a clean,dry
cloth,or use M otorcraft D ash & VinylCleaner (ZC-38-A ).
Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss ofthe upper portion of
the instrum ent panel.The dullfinish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable w indshield reflection.
D o not use chem icalsolvents or strong detergents w hen cleaning
the steering w heelor instrum ent panelto avoid contam ination of
the airbag system .
Be certain to w ash or w ipe your hands clean ifyou have been in
contact w ith certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible dam age to the interior painted
surfaces.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
238
INTERIOR TRIM
Clean the interior trim areas w ith a dam p cloth,then w ith a clean,dry
cloth;you m ay also use M otorcraft D ash & VinylCleaner (ZC-38-A ).
D o not use household or glass cleaners as these m ay dam age the
finish.
INTERIOR
For fabric,carpets,cloth seats,safety belts and seats equipped w ith side
airbags:
Rem ove dust and loose dirt w ith a vacuum cleaner.
Rem ove light stains and soilw ith M otorcraft ProfessionalStrength
Carpet & U pholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
Ifgrease or tar is present on the m aterial,spot-clean the area first
w ith M otorcraft Spot and Stain Rem over (ZC-14).
Ifa ring form s on the fabric after spot cleaning,clean the entire area
im m ediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring w illset.
D o not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners,w hich can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flam e retardant abilities of
the seat m aterials.
D o not use cleaning solvents,bleach or dye on the vehicles
safety belts,as these actions m ay w eaken the belt w ebbing.
D o not use chem icalsolvents or strong detergents w hen cleaning
the seat-m ounted side airbag (ifequipped).Such products could
contam inate the side airbag system and affect perform ance ofthe side
airbag in a collision.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear,protective coating over the
leather.
To clean,use a soft cloth w ith M otorcraft D eluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11A ).D ry the area w ith a soft cloth.
To help m aintain its resiliency and color,use the M otorcraft D eluxe
Leather Care K it (ZC-11D ),available from your authorized dealer.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
239
D o not use household cleaning products,alcoholsolutions,solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber,vinyland plastics,or oil/petroleum -based
leather conditioners.These products m ay cause prem ature w earing of
the clear,protective coating.
Note: In som e instances,color or dye transfer can occur w hen w et
clothing com es in contact w ith leather upholstery.Ifthis occurs,the
leather should be cleaned im m ediately to avoid perm anent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the com plete underside ofyour vehicle frequently.K eep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln M ercury authorized dealer has m any quality
products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes.These
quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfillyour
autom otive needs;they are custom designed to com plem ent the style
and appearance ofyour vehicle.E ach product is m ade from high quality
m aterials that m eet or exceed rigid specifications.For best results,use
the follow ing products or products ofequivalent quality:
M otorcraft Bug and Tar Rem over (ZC-42)
M otorcraft Car Care K it (ZC-26)
M otorcraft Car W ash (Canada only) (CX C-21)
M otorcraft Custom Bright M etalCleaner (ZC-15)
M otorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC8A )
M otorcraft Custom VinylProtectant (U .S.only) (ZC-40-A )
M otorcraft D ash and VinylCleaner (ZC-38A )
M otorcraft D eluxe Leather and VinylCleaner (U .S.only) (ZC-11A )
M otorcraft D etailW ash (ZC-3A )
M otorcraft D usting Cloth (ZC-24)
M otorcraft E ngine Sham poo and D egreaser (U .S.only) (ZC-20)
M otorcraft E ngine Sham poo (Canada only) (CX C-66-A )
M otorcraft O ne Step W ash and W ax Concentrate (ZC-6-A )
M otorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45)
M otorcraft Prem ium Car W ash Concentrate (U .S.only) (ZC-17-B)
M otorcraft Prem ium G lass Cleaner (Canada only) (CX C-100)
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
240
M otorcraft Prem ium Liquid W ax (ZC-53-A )
M otorcraft Prem ium W indshield W asher Concentrate (ZC-32A )
M otorcraft ProfessionalStrength Carpet & U pholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
M otorcraft Spot and Stain Rem over (U .S.only) (ZC-14)
M otorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
M otorcraft Triple Clean (U .S.only) (ZC-13)
M otorcraft U ltra-Clear Spray G lass Cleaner (ZC-23)
M otorcraft VinylCleaner (Canada only) (CX C-93)
M otorcraft VinylConditioner (Canada only) (CX C-94)
M otorcraft W heeland Tire Cleaner (ZC-37A )
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
241
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle:
W e highlight do-it-yourselfitem s in the engine com partm ent for easy
location.
W e provide scheduled mai ntenance i nformati on w hich m akes
tracking routine service easy.
Ifyour vehicle requires professionalservice,your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service.Check your Warranty
Gui de/Owner Informati on Gui de to find out w hich parts and services
are covered.
U se only recom m ended fuels,lubricants,fluids and service parts
conform ing to specifications.M otorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best perform ance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
D o not w ork on a hot engine.
M ake sure that nothing gets caught in m oving parts.
D o not w ork on a vehicle w ith the engine running in an enclosed
space,unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
K eep allopen flam es and other lit m aterialaw ay from the battery and
allfuelrelated parts.
Working with the engine off
A utom atic transm ission:
1.Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2.Turn offthe engine and rem ove the key.
3.Block the w heels.
M anualtransm ission:
1.Set the parking brake,depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1
(First).
2.Turn offthe engine and rem ove the key.
Working with the engine on
A utom atic transm ission:
1.Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
242
M anualtransm ission:
1.Set the parking brake,depress the clutch and place the gearshift in N
(N eutral).
Note: D o not start your engine w ith the air cleaner rem oved and do not
rem ove it w hile the engine is running.
OPENING THE HOOD
1.Inside the vehicle,pullthe hood
release handle located under the
bottom ofthe instrum ent panel.
2.A t the front ofthe vehicle,lift up on the auxiliary latch handle located
in the center betw een the hood and the grille.
3.Lift the hood open and secure it w ith the prop rod.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
243
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.3L I4 engine
1.Pow er steering fluid reservoir
2.E ngine coolant reservoir
3.A utom atic transm ission dipstick
4.Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir
5.A ir filter assem bly
6.Pow er distribution box
7.Battery
8.E ngine oilfiller cap
9.E ngine oildipstick
10.W indshield w asher fluid reservoir
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
244
3.0L DOHC V6 Duratec engine
1.Pow er steering fluid reservoir
2.E ngine coolant reservoir
3.A utom atic transm ission fluid dipstick
4.Brake fluid reservoir
5.A ir filter assem bly
6.Pow er distribution box
7.Battery
8.E ngine oildipstick
9.E ngine oilfiller cap
10.W indshield w asher fluid reservoir
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
245
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
A dd fluid to fillthe reservoir ifthe
levelis low.In very cold w eather,do
not fillthe reservoir com pletely.
O nly use a w asher fluid that m eets Ford specifications.D o not use any
specialw asher fluid such as w indshield w ater repellent type fluid or bug
w ash.They m ay cause squeaking,chatter noise,streaking and sm earing.
Refer to Lubri cant speci fi cati ons in this chapter.
State or localregulations on volatile organic com pounds m ay restrict the
use ofm ethanol,a com m on w indshield w asher antifreeze additive.
W asher fluids containing non-m ethanolantifreeze agents should be used
only ifthey provide cold w eather protection w ithout dam aging the
vehicles paint finish,w iper blades or w asher system .
Ifyou operate your vehicle in tem peratures below 40 F (4.5C),
use w asher fluid w ith antifreeze protection.Failure to use
w asher fluid w ith antifreeze protection in cold w eather could result in
im paired w indshield vision and increase the risk ofinjury or accident.
Note: D o not put w asher fluid in the engine coolant reservoir.W asher
fluid placed in the cooling system m ay harm engine and cooling system
com ponents.
Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate
W asher fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the sam e reservoir as the
w indshield.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
246
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1.Pullthe w iper blade and arm
aw ay from the glass.Turn the blade
at a right angle to the arm .Push the
lock tab (A ) to release the blade
from the arm loop and pullthe
blade dow n tow ard the w indshield
to rem ove it from the arm .
2.A ttach the new blade to the arm
loop and pullit into place untila
click is heard.
Replace w iper blades at least once per year for optim um perform ance.
Poor w iper quality can be im proved by cleaning the w iper blades and the
w indshield,refer to Wi ndows and wi per blades in the Cleani ng
chapter.
To prolong the life ofthe w iper blades,it is highly recom m ended to
scrape offthe ice on the w indshield before turning on the w ipers.The
layer ofice has m any sharp edges and can dam age the m icro edge ofthe
w iper rubber elem ent.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to scheduled mai ntenance i nformati on for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1.M ake sure the vehicle is on levelground.
2.Turn the engine offand w ait a few m inutes for the oilto drain into the
oilpan.
3.Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park) (autom atic transm issions) or 1 (First) (m anualtransm issions).
4.O pen the hood.Protect yourselffrom engine heat.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
247
5.Locate and carefully rem ove the engine oillevelindicator (dipstick).
2.3L I4 engine
3.0L D O H C V6 D uratec engine
6.W ipe the indicator clean.Insert the indicator fully,then rem ove it
again.
Ifthe oillevelis w ithin the M IN and M A X m arks or the low er and
upper holes,the oillevelis acceptable.DO NOT ADD OIL.
Ifthe oillevelis below the M IN m ark or the low er hole,engine oil
must be addedto raise the levelw ithin the norm aloperating range.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
248
2.3L I4 engine
3.0L D O H C V6 D uratec engine
Ifrequired,add engine oilto the engine.Refer to Addi ng engi ne oi l
in this chapter.
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Oil levels above the MAX mark
or upper hole may cause engine damage. Ifthe engine is overfilled,
som e oilm ust be rem oved from the engine by an authorized dealer.
7.Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1.Check the engine oil.For instructions,refer to Checki ng the engi ne
oi l in this chapter.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
249
2.Ifthe engine oillevelis not w ithin the norm alrange,add only certified
engine oilofthe recom m ended viscosity.Rem ove the engine oilfiller cap
and use a funnelto pour the engine oilinto the opening.
3.Recheck the engine oillevel.M ake sure the oillevelis not above the
M A X or FU LL m ark on the engine oillevelindicator (dipstick).
4.Installthe indicator and ensure it is fully seated.
5.Fully installthe engine oilfiller cap by turning the filler cap clockw ise
1/4 ofa turn untilit is seated.
To avoidpossible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler capremoved.
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
tradem ark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil.
O nly use oils Certified For G asoline E nginesby the A m erican
Petroleum Institute (A PI).A n oilw ith this tradem ark sym bolconform s
to the current engine and em ission system protection standards and fuel
econom y requirem ents ofthe InternationalLubricant Standardization and
A pprovalCom m ittee (ILSA C),com prised ofU .S.and Japanese
autom obile m anufacturers.
To protect your engines w arranty use M otorcraft SA E 5W -20 or an
equivalent 5W -20 oilm eeting Ford specification W SS-M 2C930-A .SAE
5W-20 oil provides optimumfuel economy anddurability
performance meetingall requirements for your vehicles engine.
D o not use supplem entalengine oiladditives,cleaners or other engine
treatm ents.They are unnecessary and could lead to engine dam age that
is not covered by Ford w arranty.
Change your engine oiland filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in scheduled mai ntenance i nformati on.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
250
Ford production and afterm arket (M otorcraft) oilfilters are designed for
added engine protection and long life.Ifa replacem ent oilfilter is used
that does not m eet Ford m aterialand design specifications,start-up
engine noises or knock m ay be experienced.
It is recom m ended you use the appropriate M otorcraft oilfilter (or
another brand m eeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped w ith a
M otorcraft m aintenance-free battery
w hich norm ally does not require
additionalw ater during its life of
service.
H ow ever,for severe usage or in high tem perature clim ates,check the
battery electrolyte level.Refer to scheduled mai ntenance i nformati on
for the service intervalschedules.
Keepthe electrolyte level in each cell upto the level indicator.
Do not overfill the battery cells.
Ifthe electrolyte levelin the battery is low,you can add plain tap w ater
to the battery,as long as you do not use hard w ater (w ater w ith a high
m ineralor alkalicontent).Ifpossible,how ever,try to only fillthe battery
cells w ith distilled w ater.Ifthe battery needs w ater often,have the
charging system checked.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleanedor replaced.
For longer,trouble-free operation,keep the top ofthe battery clean and
dry.A lso,m ake certain the battery cables are alw ays tightly fastened to
the battery term inals.
Ifyou see any corrosion on the battery or term inals,rem ove the cables
from the term inals and clean w ith a w ire brush.You can neutralize the
acid w ith a solution ofbaking soda and w ater.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
251
Batteries norm ally produce explosive gases w hich can cause
personalinjury.Therefore,do not allow flam es,sparks or lighted
substances to com e near the battery.W hen w orking near the battery,
alw ays shield your face and protect your eyes.A lw ays provide proper
ventilation.
W hen lifting a plastic-cased battery,excessive pressure on the end
w alls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,resulting in
personalinjury and/or dam age to the vehicle or battery.Lift the battery
w ith a battery carrier or w ith your hands on opposite corners.
K eep batteries out ofreach ofchildren.Batteries contain sulfuric
acid.Avoid contact w ith skin,eyes or clothing.Shield your eyes
w hen w orking near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution.In case ofacid contact w ith skin or eyes,flush
im m ediately w ith w ater for a m inim um of15 m inutes and get prom pt
m edicalattention.Ifacid is sw allow ed,calla physician im m ediately.
Battery posts,term inals and related accessories contain lead and
lead com pounds.Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicles engine is electronically controlled by a com puter,
som e controlconditions are m aintained by pow er from the battery.W hen
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed,the engine m ust
relearn its idle and fueltrim strategy for optim um driveability and
perform ance.To begin this process:
1.W ith the vehicle at a com plete stop,set the parking brake.
2.Put the gearshift in P (Park),turn offallaccessories and start the engine.
3.Run the engine untilit reaches norm aloperating tem perature.
4.A llow the engine to idle for at least one m inute.
5.Turn the A /C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one m inute.
6.D rive the vehicle to com plete the relearning process.
The vehicle m ay need to be driven 10 m iles (16 km ) or m ore to
relearn the idle and fueltrim strategy.
If you do not allowthe engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affecteduntil the idle
trimis eventually relearned.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
252
W hen the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed,the
transm ission m ust relearn its adaptive strategy.A s a result ofthis,the
transm ission m ay shift firm ly.This operation is considered norm aland
w illnot affect function or durability ofthe transm ission.O ver tim e the
adaptive learning process w illfully update transm ission operation to its
optim um shift feel.
Ifthe battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations m ust be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
A lw ays dispose ofautom otive
batteries in a responsible m anner.
Follow your localauthorized
standards for disposal.Callyour
localauthorized recycling center
to find out m ore about recycling
autom otive batteries.
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and levelofengine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled mai ntenance i nformati on. The coolant
concentration should be m aintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled w ater,
w hich equates to a freeze point of-34F (-36C).Coolant concentration
testing is possible w ith a hydrom eter or antifreeze tester (such as the
Rotunda Battery and A ntifreeze Tester,014R1060).The levelofcoolant
should be m aintained at the FU LL CO LD levelor w ithin the CO LD
FILL RA N G E in the coolant reservoir.Ifthe levelfalls below,add
coolant per the instructions in the Addi ng engi ne coolant section.
Your vehicle w as factory-filled w ith a 50/50 engine coolant and w ater
concentration.Ifthe concentration ofcoolant falls below 40% or above
60% ,the engine parts could becom e dam aged or not w ork properly.A
5050 mixture of coolant andwater provides the following:
Freeze protection down to -34F (-36C).
Boilingprotection upto 265F (129C).
Protection against rust andother forms of corrosion.
Enables calibratedgauges to work properly.
L
E
A
D
R
E
T
U
R
N
RECYCLE
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
253
W hen the engine is cold,check the
levelofthe engine coolant in the
reservoir.
The engine coolant should be at the FU LL CO LD levelor w ithin the
CO LD FILL RA N G E as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
Refer to scheduled mai ntenance i nformati on for service interval
schedules.
Be sure to read and understand Precauti ons when servi ci ng your
vehi cle in this chapter.
Ifthe engine coolant has not been checked at the recom m ended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir m ay becom e low or em pty.Ifthe reservoir is
low or em pty,add engine coolant to the reservoir.Refer to Addi ng
engi ne coolant in this chapter.
Note: A utom otive fluids are not interchangeable;do not use engine
coolant,antifreeze or w indshield w asher fluid outside ofits specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
W hen adding coolant,m ake sure it is a 50/50 m ixture ofengine coolant
and distilled w ater.A dd the m ixture to the coolant reservoir,when the
engine is cool, untilthe appropriate filllevelis obtained.
D o not add engine coolant w hen the engine is hot.Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly.A lso,you can be burned ifyou spillcoolant on hot engine parts.
D o not put engine coolant in the w indshield w asher fluid
container.Ifsprayed on the w indshield,engine coolant could
m ake it difficult to see through the w indshield.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
254
AddMotorcraft PremiumGoldEngine Coolant
(yellow-colored), VC-7A (U.S., except CA, OR andNM),
VC-7B (CA, OR andNM), meetingFordSpecification
WSS-M97B51A1.
Note: U se ofM otorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets,VC-6,m ay
darken the color ofM otorcraft Prem ium G old E ngine Coolant from
yellow to golden tan.
Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extendedlife coolant such
as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 andVC-3
(US) or CXC-209 (Canada), meetingFordspecification
WSS-M97B44D with the factory-filledcoolant. M ixing M otorcraft
Specialty O range E ngine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life
product w ith your factory filled coolant can result in degraded
corrosion protection.
A large am ount ofw ater w ithout engine coolant m ay be added,in case
ofem ergency,to reach a vehicle service location.In this instance,the
cooling system m ust be drained and refilled w ith a 50/50 m ixture of
engine coolant and distilled w ater as soon as possible.W ater alone
(w ithout engine coolant) can cause engine dam age from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixedwith alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). A lcohol
and other liquids can cause engine dam age from overheating or
freezing.
Do not addextra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harm fuland com prom ise the corrosion protection ofthe engine
coolant.
For vehicles w ith overflow coolant system s w ith a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system ,add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir w hen the engine is cool.A dd the proper m ixture ofcoolant and
w ater to the FU LL CO LD level.For allother vehicles w hich have a
coolant degas system w ith a pressurized cap,or ifit is necessary to
rem ove the coolant pressure reliefcap on the radiator ofa vehicle w ith
an overflow system ,follow these steps to add engine coolant.
To reduce the risk ofpersonalinjury,m ake sure the engine is
coolbefore unscrew ing the coolant pressure reliefcap.The
cooling system is under pressure;steam and hot liquid can com e out
forcefully w hen the cap is loosened slightly.
1.Before you begin,turn the engine offand let it cool.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
255
2.W hen the engine is cool,w rap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure reliefcap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slow ly turn cap counterclockw ise (left) untilpressure begins to release.
3.Step back w hile the pressure releases.
4.W hen you are sure that allthe pressure has been released,use the
cloth to turn it counterclockw ise and rem ove the cap.
5.Fillthe coolant reservoir slow ly w ith the proper coolant m ixture (see
above),to w ithin the CO LD FILL RA N G E or the FU LL CO LD levelon
the reservoir.Ifyou rem oved the radiator cap in an overflow system ,fill
the radiator untilthe coolant is visible and radiator is alm ost full.
6.Replace the cap.Turn untiltightly installed.(Cap m ust be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.)
A fter any coolant has been added,check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checki ng engi ne coolant).Ifthe concentration is not 50/50
(protection to 34 F/36 C),drain som e coolant and adjust the
concentration.It m ay take severaldrains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
W henever coolant has been added,the coolant levelin the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few tim es you drive the vehicle.If
necessary,add enough 50/50 concentration ofengine coolant and
distilled w ater to bring the liquid levelto the proper level.
Ifyou have to add m ore than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) ofengine coolant per
m onth,have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system .
Your cooling system m ay have a leak.O perating an engine w ith a low
levelofcoolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
dam age.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford M otor Com pany does N O T recom m end the use ofrecycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped w ith M otorcraft Prem ium G old
E ngine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
U sed engine coolant should be disposed ofin an appropriate
m anner.Follow your com m unitys regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing ofautom otive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how m uch fluid your vehicles cooling system can hold,refer
to Refi ll capaci ti es in this section.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
256
Fillyour engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Addi ng engi ne coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
Ifyou drive in extrem ely cold clim ates (less than 34 F [36 C ]):
It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
Increasedengine coolant concentrations above 60%will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant andmay cause engine damage.
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
Ifyou drive in extrem ely hot clim ates:
It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below40%.
Decreasedengine coolant concentrations below40%will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
Decreasedengine coolant concentrations below40%will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extrem e clim ates should use a 50/50
m ixture ofengine coolant and distilled w ater for optim um cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (2.3L I4 engine only)
Ifthe engine coolant supply is depleted,this feature allow s the vehicle to
be driven tem porarily before increm entalcom ponent dam age is incurred.
The fail-safedistance depends on am bient tem peratures,vehicle load
and terrain.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
257
How fail-safe cooling works
Ifthe engine begins to overheat:
The engine coolant tem perature
gauge w illm ove to the red (hot)
area.
The indicator light w ill
illum inate.
H IG H E N G IN E TE M PE RATU RE
w illbe displayed in the m essage center.
Ifthe engine reaches a preset over-tem perature condition,the engine
w illautom atically sw itch to alternating cylinder operation.E ach disabled
cylinder acts as an air pum p and cools the engine.
W hen this occurs the vehicle w illstilloperate.H ow ever:
The engine pow er w illbe lim ited.
The air conditioning system w illbe disabled.
Continued operation w illincrease the engine tem perature and the engine
w illcom pletely shut dow n,causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
O nce the engine tem perature cools,the engine can be re-started.Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to m inim ize
engine dam age.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have lim ited engine pow er w hen in the fail-safe m ode,so drive the
vehicle w ith caution.The vehicle w illnot be able to m aintain high-speed
operation and the engine w illrun rough.Rem em ber that the engine is
capable ofcom pletely shutting dow n autom atically to prevent engine
dam age,therefore:
1.Pulloffthe road as soon as safely possible and turn offthe engine.
2.A rrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3.Ifthis is not possible,w ait a short period for the engine to cool.
4.Check the coolant leveland replenish iflow.
running or hot.
5.Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
258
Drivingthe vehicle without repairingthe engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorizeddealer as soon as possible.
FUEL FILTER
For fuelfilter replacem ent,see your authorized dealer.Refer to
scheduled mai ntenance i nformati on for the appropriate intervals for
changing the fuelfilter.
Replace the fuel filter with an authorizedMotorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be voidfor any damage to the fuel system
if an authorizedMotorcraft fuel filter is not used.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
D o not overfillthe fueltank.The pressure in an overfilled tank
m ay cause leakage and lead to fuelspray and fire.
The fuelsystem m ay be under pressure.Ifthe fuelfiller cap is
venting vapor or ifyou hear a hissing sound,w ait untilit stops
before com pletely rem oving the fuelfiller cap.O therw ise,fuelm ay
spray out and injure you or others.
Ifyou do not use the proper fuelfiller cap,excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fueltank m ay dam age the fuelsystem or cause
the fuelcap to disengage in a collision,w hich m ay result in possible
personalinjury.
A utom otive fuels can cause serious injury or death ifm isused or
m ishandled.
G asoline m ay contain benzene,w hich is a cancer-causing agent.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
259
O bserve the follow ing guidelines w hen handling autom otive fuel:
E xtinguish allsm oking m aterials
and any open flam es before
refueling your vehicle.
A lw ays turn offthe vehicle before
refueling.
A utom otive fuels can be harm ful
or fatalifsw allow ed.Fuelsuch as gasoline is highly toxic and if
sw allow ed can cause death or perm anent injury.Iffuelis sw allow ed,
calla physician im m ediately,even ifno sym ptom s are im m ediately
apparent.The toxic effects offuelm ay not be visible for hours.
Avoid inhaling fuelvapors.Inhaling too m uch fuelvapor ofany kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation.In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing offuelvapor can cause serious
illness and perm anent injury.
Avoid getting fuelliquid in your eyes.Iffuelis splashed in the eyes,
rem ove contact lenses (ifw orn),flush w ith w ater for 15 m inutes and
seek m edicalattention.Failure to seek proper m edicalattention could
lead to perm anent injury.
Fuels can also be harm fulifabsorbed through the skin.Iffuelis
splashed on the skin and/or clothing,prom ptly rem ove contam inated
clothing and w ash skin thoroughly w ith soap and w ater.Repeated or
prolonged skin contact w ith fuelliquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
Be particularly carefulifyou are taking A ntabuseor other form s of
disulfiram for the treatm ent ofalcoholism .Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction.In sensitive
individuals,serious personalinjury or sickness m ay result.Iffuelis
splashed on the skin,prom ptly w ash skin thoroughly w ith soap and
w ater.Consult a physician im m ediately ifyou experience an adverse
reaction.
W hen refueling alw ays shut the engine offand never allow
sparks or open flam es near the filler neck.N ever sm oke w hile
refueling.Fuelvapor is extrem ely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fum es.
The flow offuelthrough a fuelpum p nozzle can produce static
electricity,w hich can cause a fire iffuelis pum ped into an
ungrounded fuelcontainer.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
260
Refueling
Fuelvapor burns violently and a fuelfire can cause severe
injuries.To help avoid injuries to you and others:
Read and follow allthe instructions on the pum p island;
Turn offyour engine w hen you are refueling;
D o not sm oke ifyou are near fuelor refueling your vehicle;
K eep sparks,flam es and sm oking m aterials aw ay from fuel;
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuelpum p unattended
w hen refueling your vehicle this is against the law in som e places;
K eep children aw ay from the fuelpum p;never let children pum p fuel
U se the follow ing guidelines to avoid static build-up w hen filling an
ungrounded fuelcontainer:
Place approved fuelcontainer on the ground.
D O N O T filla fuelcontainer w hile it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
K eep the fuelpum p nozzle in contact w ith the fuelcontainer w hile filling.
D O N O T use a device that w ould hold the fuelpum p handle in the fill
position.
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fueltank filler cap has an indexed design w ith a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
W hen fueling your vehicle:
1.Turn the engine/ignition sw itch to the offposition.
2.Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockw ise untilit spins off.
3.To installthe cap,align the lugs on the cap w ith the threads on the
filler pipe.
4.Turn the filler cap clockw ise untilit clicks at least once.
A fter refueling,ifthe CH E CK FU E L CA Pindicator com es on and stays
on w hen you start the engine,the fuelfiller cap m ay not be properly
installed.Turn offthe engine,rem ove the fuelfiller cap,align the cap
properly and reinstallit securely.The CH E CK FU E L CA Pindicator
should turn offafter three driving cycles w ith the fuelfiller cap properly
installed.A driving cycle consists ofa cold engine start-up follow ed by
m ixed city/highw ay driving.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
261
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
capthat is designedfor your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be voidfor any damage to the fuel tank or fuel systemif the
correct genuine Fordor Motorcraft fuel filler capis not used.
The fuelsystem m ay be under pressure.Rem ove fuelfiller cap
slow ly.O therw ise,fuelm ay spray out and injure you or others.
Ifyou do not use the proper fuelfiller cap,excessive vacuum in
the fueltank m ay dam age the fuelsystem or cause the fuelcap
to disengage in a collision,w hich m ay result in possible personalinjury.
Choosing the right fuel
U se only U N LE A D E D FU E L.The use ofleaded fuelis prohibited by law
and could dam age your vehicle.
Your vehicle w as not designed to use fuelor fueladditives w ith m etallic
com pounds,including m anganese-based additives.Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicles em ission controlsystem to
deteriorate m ore rapidly.In Canada,prem ium grade fuelgenerally
contains m ore m etallic additives than regular grade fuel.W e recom m end
using regular grade fuel.In Canada,m any fuels contain m etallic
additives,but fuels free ofsuch additives m ay be available;check w ith
your localfueldealer.
D o not use fuelcontaining m ethanol.It can dam age criticalfuelsystem
com ponents.
Repairs to correct the effects ofusing a fuelfor w hich your vehicle w as
not designed m ay not be covered by your w arranty.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
262
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
Regularunleaded gasoline w ith
pum p (R+M )/2 octane rating of87.
W e do not recom m end the use of
gasolines labeled as Regularthat
are sold w ith octane ratings of86 or low er in high altitude areas.
D o not be concerned ifyour engine som etim es knocks lightly.H ow ever,if
it knocks heavily under m ost driving conditions w hile you are using fuel
w ith the recom m ended octane rating,see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine dam age.
Fuel quality
Ifyou are experiencing starting,rough idle or hesitation driveability
problem s,try a different brand ofunleaded gasoline.Prem ium unleaded
gasoline is not recom m ended for vehicles designed to use Regular
unleaded gasoline because it m ay cause these problem s to becom e m ore
pronounced.Ifthe problem s persist,see your authorized dealer.
It should not be necessary to add any afterm arket products to your fuel
tank ifyou continue to use high quality fuelofthe recom m ended octane
rating.A fterm arket products could cause dam age to the fuelsystem .
Repairs to correct the effects ofusing an afterm arket product in your
fuelm ay not be covered by your w arranty.
M any ofthe w orlds autom akers approved the W orld-w ide FuelCharter
that recom m ends gasoline specifications to provide im proved
perform ance and em ission controlsystem protection for your vehicle.
G asolines that m eet the W orld-w ide FuelCharter should be used w hen
available.A sk your fuelsupplier about gasolines that m eet the
W orld-w ide FuelCharter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use ofreform ulated cleaner-burninggasolines to
im prove air quality.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out offuelbecause this situation m ay have an adverse
effect on pow ertrain com ponents.
Ifyou have run out offuel:
You m ay need to cycle the ignition from offto on severaltim es after
refueling,to allow the fuelsystem to pum p the fuelfrom the tank to
the engine.
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
263
The indicator m ay com e on.For m ore inform ation on the check
engineor the service engine soonindicator,refer to Warni ng li ghts
and chi mes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source ofinform ation about actualfueleconom y is you,the
driver.You m ust gather inform ation as accurately and consistently as
possible.Fuelexpense,frequency offill-ups or fuelgauge readings are
N O T accurate as a m easure offueleconom y.W e do not recom m end
taking fueleconom y m easurem ents during the first 1,000 m iles (1,600
km ) ofdriving (engine break-in period).You w illget a m ore accurate
m easurem ent after 2,000 m iles-3,000 m iles (3,000 km 5,000 km ).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuelcapacity ofthe fueltank on your vehicle is equalto
the rated refillcapacity ofthe fueltank as listed in the Refi ll capaci ti es
section ofthis chapter.
The advertised capacity is the am ount ofthe indicated capacity and the
em pty reserve com bined.Indicated capacity is the difference in the
am ount offuelin a fulltank and a tank w hen the fuelgauge indicates
em pty.E m pty reserve is the sm allam ount offuelrem aining in the fuel
tank after the fuelgauge indicates em pty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies andshould
not be reliedupon to increase drivingrange. When refuelingyour
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertisedcapacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results w hen filling the fueltank:
Turn the engine/ignition sw itch to the offposition prior to refueling,
an error in the reading w illresult ifthe engine is left running.
U se the sam e filling rate setting (low m edium high) each tim e
the tank is filled.
A llow no m ore than tw o autom atic click-offs w hen filling.
A lw ays use fuelw ith the recom m ended octane rating.
U se a know n quality gasoline,preferably a nationalbrand.
U se the sam e side ofthe sam e pum p and have the vehicle facing the
sam e direction each tim e you fillup.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
264
H ave the vehicle loading and distribution the sam e every tim e.
Your results w illbe m ost accurate ifyour filling m ethod is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1.Fillthe fueltank com pletely and record the initialodom eter reading
(in m iles or kilom eters).
2.E ach tim e you fillthe tank,record the am ount offueladded (in
gallons or liters).
3.A fter at least three to five tank fill-ups,fillthe fueltank and record
the current odom eter reading.
4.Subtract your initialodom eter reading from the current odom eter
reading.
5.Follow one ofthe sim ple calculations in order to determ ine fuel
econom y:
Calculation 1:Divide total miles traveledby total gallons used.
Calculation 2:Multiply liters usedby 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
K eep a record for at least one m onth and record the type ofdriving (city
or highw ay).This w illprovide an accurate estim ate ofthe vehicles fuel
econom y under current driving conditions.A dditionally,keeping records
during sum m er and w inter w illshow how tem perature im pacts fuel
econom y.In general,low er tem peratures give low er fueleconom y.
Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits
G ive consideration to the lists that follow and you m ay be able to change
a num ber ofvariables and im prove your fueleconom y.
Habits
Sm ooth,m oderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
Steady speeds w ithout stopping w illusually give the best fuel
econom y.
Idling for long periods oftim e (greater than one m inute) m ay w aste
fuel.
A nticipate stopping;slow ing dow n m ay elim inate the need to stop.
Sudden or hard accelerations m ay reduce fueleconom y.
Slow dow n gradually.
D riving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 m ph [88 km /h]uses 15%
less fuelthan traveling at 65 m ph [105 km /h]).
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
265
Revving the engine before turning it offm ay reduce fueleconom y.
U sing the air conditioner or defroster m ay reduce fueleconom y.
You m ay w ant to turn offthe speed controlin hilly terrain ifunnecessary
shifting betw een third and fourth gear occurs.U nnecessary shifting of
this type could result in reduced fueleconom y.
W arm ing up a vehicle on cold m ornings is not required and m ay
reduce fueleconom y.
Resting your foot on the brake pedalw hile driving m ay reduce fuel
econom y.
Com bine errands and m inim ize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
K eep tires properly inflated and use only recom m ended size.
O perating a vehicle w ith the w heels out ofalignm ent w illreduce fuel
econom y.
U se recom m ended engine oil.Refer to Lubri cant speci fi cati ons in
this chapter.
Perform allregularly scheduled m aintenance item s.Follow the
recom m ended m aintenance schedule and ow ner m aintenance checks
found in scheduled mai ntenance i nformati on.
Conditions
H eavily loading a vehicle or tow ing a trailer m ay reduce fueleconom y
at any speed.
Carrying unnecessary w eight m ay reduce fueleconom y (approxim ately
1 m pg [0.4 km /L]is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg]ofw eight carried).
A dding certain accessories to your vehicle (for exam ple bug
deflectors,rollbars/light bars,running boards,ski/luggage racks) m ay
reduce fueleconom y.
U sing fuelblended w ith alcoholm ay low er fueleconom y.
Fueleconom y m ay decrease w ith low er tem peratures during the first
810 m iles (1216 km ) ofdriving.
D riving on flat terrain offers im proved fueleconom y as com pared to
driving on hilly terrain.
Transm issions give their best fueleconom y w hen operated in the top
cruise gear and w ith steady pressure on the gas pedal.
Close w indow s for high speed driving.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
266
EPA window sticker
E very new vehicle should have the E PA w indow sticker.Contact your
authorized dealer ifthe w indow sticker is not supplied w ith your vehicle.
The E PA w indow sticker should be your guide for the fueleconom y
com parisons w ith other vehicles.
It is im portant to note the box in the low er left corner ofthe w indow
sticker.These num bers represent the Range ofM PG (L/100 km )
expected on the vehicle under optim um conditions.Your fueleconom y
m ay vary depending upon the m ethod ofoperation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped w ith various em ission controlcom ponents and a
catalytic converter w hich w illenable your vehicle to com ply w ith
applicable exhaust em ission standards.To m ake sure that the catalytic
converter and other em ission controlcom ponents continue to w ork
properly:
U se only the specified fuellisted.
Avoid running out offuel.
D o not turn offthe ignition w hile your vehicle is m oving,especially at
high speeds.
H ave the item s listed in scheduled mai ntenance i nformati on
perform ed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled m aintenance item s listed in scheduled mai ntenance
i nformati on are essentialto the life and perform ance ofyour vehicle
and to its em issions system .
Ifother than Ford,M otorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
m aintenance replacem ents or for service ofcom ponents affecting
em ission control,such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford M otor Com pany parts in perform ance and durability.
D o not park,idle,or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover.The em ission system heats up the engine
com partm ent and exhaust system ,w hich can start a fire.
Illum ination ofthe indicator,charging system w arning light or the
tem perature w arning light,fluid leaks,strange odors,sm oke or loss of
engine pow er could indicate that the em ission controlsystem is not
w orking properly.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
267
E xhaust leaks m ay result in entry ofharm fuland potentially
lethalfum es into the passenger com partm ent.
D o not m ake any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine.By
law,vehicle ow ners and anyone w ho m anufactures,repairs,services,
sells,leases,trades vehicles,or supervises a fleet ofvehicles are not
perm itted to intentionally rem ove an em ission controldevice or prevent
it from w orking.Inform ation about your vehicles em ission system is on
the Vehicle E m ission ControlInform ation D ecallocated on or near the
engine.This decalidentifies engine displacem ent and gives som e tune up
specifications.
Please consult your Warranty Gui de for com plete em ission w arranty
inform ation.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped w ith a com puter that m onitors the engines
em ission controlsystem .This system is com m only know n as the O n
Board D iagnostics System (O BD -II).This O BD -IIsystem protects the
environm ent by ensuring that your vehicle continues to m eet
governm ent em ission standards.The O BD -IIsystem also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle.W hen the
indicator illum inates,the O BD -IIsystem has detected a m alfunction.
Tem porary m alfunctions m ay cause the indicator to illum inate.
E xam ples are:
1.The vehicle has run out offuelthe engine m ay m isfire or run poorly.
2.Poor fuelquality or w ater in the fuel.
3.The fuelcap m ay not have been securely tightened.See Fuel fi ller
cap in this chapter.
These tem porary m alfunctions can be corrected by filling the fueltank
w ith good quality fueland/or properly tightening the fuelcap.A fter three
driving cycles w ithout these or any other tem porary m alfunctions
present,the indicator should turn offA driving cycle consists ofa
cold engine startup follow ed by m ixed city/highw ay driving.N o additional
vehicle service is required.
Ifthe indicator rem ains on,have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
268
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
In som e localities,it m ay be a legalrequirem ent to pass an I/M test of
the on-board diagnostics system .Ifthe indicator is on,refer to the
description in the Warni ng li ghts and chi mes section ofthe
Instrument Cluster chapter.Your vehicle m ay not pass the I/M test w ith
the indicator on.
Ifthe vehicles pow ertrain system or its battery has just been serviced,
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a not ready for I/M test
condition.To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing,a
m inim um of30 m inutes ofcity and highw ay driving is necessary as
described below :
First,at least 10 m inutes ofdriving on an expressw ay or highw ay.
N ext,at least 20 m inutes driving in stop-and-go,city-type traffic w ith
at least four idle periods.
A llow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours w ithout starting the
engine.Then,start the engine and com plete the above driving cycle.The
engine m ust w arm up to its norm aloperating tem perature.O nce started,
do not turn offthe engine untilthe above driving cycle is com plete.
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the pow er steering fluid.
Refer to scheduled mai ntenance
for the service intervalschedules.If
addingfluidis necessary, use
only MERCON ATF.
1.Start the engine and let it run untilit reaches norm aloperating
tem perature (the engine coolant tem perature gauge indicator w illbe
near the center ofthe norm alarea betw een H and C).
2.W hile the engine idles,turn the steering w heelleft and right several
tim es.
3.Turn the engine off.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
269
4.Check the fluid levelin the
reservoir.It should be betw een the
M IN and M A X lines.D o not add
fluid ifthe levelis in this range.
5.Ifthe fluid is low,add fluid in sm allam ounts,continuously checking
the leveluntilit reaches the range betw een the M IN and M A X lines.Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir.
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID
Brake and clutch system s are supplied from the sam e reservoir.
The fluid levelw illdrop slow ly as
the brakes w ear,and w illrise w hen
the brake com ponents are replaced.
Fluid levels betw een the M IN and
M A X lines are w ithin the norm al
operating range;there is no need to
add fluid.Ifthe fluid levels are
outside ofthe norm aloperating
range the perform ance ofyour
brake system could be
com prom ised;seek service from your authorized dealer im m ediately.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
Refer to your scheduled mai ntenance i nformati on for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes.Your transaxle does not consum e
fluid.H ow ever,the fluid levelshould be checked ifthe transaxle is not
w orking properly,i.e.,ifthe transaxle slips or shifts slow ly or ifyou
notice som e sign offluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluidexpands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluidcheck, drive the vehicle until it is warmedup
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operatedfor an extendedperiodat high speeds, in city traffic
M
AX
M
IN
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
270
duringhot weather or pullinga trailer, the vehicle shouldbe
turnedoff for about 30 minutes to allowfluidto cool before
checking.
1.D rive the vehicle 20 m iles (30 km ) or untilit reaches norm aloperating
tem perature.
2.Park the vehicle on a levelsurface and engage the parking brake.
3.W ith the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and m ove the gearshift lever through allofthe gear
ranges.A llow sufficient tim e for each gear to engage.
4.Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5.Rem ove the dipstick,w iping it clean w ith a clean,dry lint free rag.If
necessary,refer to Identi fyi ng components i n the engi ne compartment
in this chapter for the location ofthe dipstick.
6.Installthe dipstick m aking sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7.Rem ove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level.The fluid should be in
the crosshatch zone for norm aloperating tem perature.
Low fluid level
D o not drive the vehicle ifthe fluid
levelis at the bottom ofthe dipstick
and the outside tem peratures are
above 50F (10C).
Correct fluid level
The transm ission fluid should be checked at norm aloperating
tem peratures 150F-170F (66C-77C) on a levelsurface.The norm al
operating tem perature can be reached after approxim ately 20 m iles (30
km ) ofdriving.
The transm ission fluid should be in
the crosshatch zone ifat norm al
operating tem perature (150F-170F
[66C-77C]).
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
271
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the crosshatch
zone m ay result in transaxle failure.
A n overfillcondition oftransm ission
fluid m ay cause shift and/or
engagem ent concerns and/or
possible dam age.
H igh fluid levels can be caused by
an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid,m ake sure the correct type is used.The type of
fluid used is norm ally indicated on the dipstick blade and also in the
Lubri cant speci fi cati ons section in this chapter.
Use of a non-approvedautomatic transmission fluidmay cause
internal transaxle component damage.
Ifnecessary,add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 m l) increm ents through the filler
tube untilthe levelis correct.
Ifan overfilloccurs,excess fluid
should be rem oved by an authorized
dealer.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluidmay cause
shift and/or engagement
concerns and/or possible
damage.
D o not use supplem entaltransm ission fluid additives,treatm ents or
cleaning agents.The use ofthese m aterials m ay affect transm ission
operation and result in dam age to internaltransm ission com ponents.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
272
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)
1.Park the vehicle on a level
surface.
2.E ngage the parking brake fully
put in first gear.
3.A ssure the vehicle cannot m ove.
4.Clean the filler plug.
5.Rem ove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
6.Fluid levelshould be at bottom of
the opening.
7.A dd enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid levelis at
the bottom ofthe opening.
8.Installand tighten the fillplug securely.
U se only fluid that m eets Ford specifications.Refer to the Lubri cant
speci fi cati ons in this chapter.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled mai ntenance i nformati on for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter elem ent.
W hen changing the air filter elem ent,use only the M otorcraft air filter
elem ent listed.Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
Note: D o not start your engine w ith the air cleaner rem oved and do not
rem ove it w hile the engine is running.
1.Loosen the clam p that secures the air inlet tube to the engine air filter
cover and disconnect the tube from the cover (for V6 only).
2.Release the clam ps that secure the air filter housing cover.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
273
3.Carefully separate the tw o halves
ofthe air filter housing.
4.Rem ove the air filter elem ent from the air filter housing.
5.W ipe the air filter housing and cover clean to rem ove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
6.Installa new air filter elem ent.Be
carefulnot to crim p the filter
elem ent edges betw een the air filter
housing and cover.This could cause
filter dam age and allow unfiltered
air to enter the engine ifnot
properly seated.
7.Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clam ps.
8.Replace the air inlet tube and secure the clam p.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter elem ent m ay result in severe
engine dam age.The custom er w arranty m ay be voided for any dam age to
the engine ifthe correct air filter elem ent is not used.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
274
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component 2.3L I4 engine 3.0L DOHC V6 Duratec
engine
A ir filter elem ent
1
FA -1683 FA -1683
Fuelfilter FG -800-A FG -800-A
Battery BX T-40R BX T-40R
O ilfilter FL-910 FL-820-S
PCV valve
2
Spark Plugs
3
1
Failure to use the correct air filter elem ent m ay result in severe engine
dam age.The custom er w arranty m ay be voided for any dam age to the
engine ifthe correct air filter elem ent is not used.
2
The PCV valve is a criticalem ission com ponent.It is one ofthe item s
listed in scheduled mai ntenance i nformati on and is essentialto the
life and perform ance ofyour vehicle and to its em issions system .
For PCV valve replacem ent,see your authorized dealer.Refer to
changing the PCV valve.
Replace the PCVvalve with one that meets Fordmaterial and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the emissions systemif such a PCVvalve is not
used.
3
For spark plug replacem ent,see your authorized dealer.Refer to
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Fordmaterial and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
voidfor any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
275
REFILL CAPACITIES
Fluid FordPart Name Application Capacity
Brake fluid
(and clutch
fluid if
equipped)
M otorcraft H igh
Perform ance D O T
3 M otor Vehicle
Brake Fluid
A ll
Fillto line on
reservoir
E ngine oil
(including filter
change)
6
M otorcraft SA E
5W -20 Prem ium
Synthetic Blend
M otor O il(U S)
M otorcraft SA E
5W -20 Super
Prem ium M otor
O il(Canada)
2.3L I4 engine
4.5 quarts
(4.25L)
3.0L V6 D uratec
engine
6.0 quarts
(5.7L)
Fueltank N /A A ll
16.5 gallons
(62.5L)
Pow er steering
fluid
M otorcraft
M E RCO N ATF
A ll
Fillto line on
reservoir
Transm ission
fluid
M otorcraft SA E
75W -90
A PIG L-4 G ear
O il
M anualtransaxle
(2W D )
2.4 quarts
(2.3L)
2
M anualtransaxle
(4X 4)
2.5 quarts
(2.4L)
2
M otorcraft
M E RCO N ATF
1
2.3L I4 engine
w ith autom atic
transaxle
10.2 quarts
(9.6L)
3
3.0L V6 D uratec
engine w ith
autom atic
transaxle
Pow er Transfer
U nit
M otorcraft SA E
75W -140 H igh
Perform ance
Synthetic Rear
A xle Lubricant
4X 4 (A utom atic)
12 ounces
(0.35L)
M otorcraft SA E
80W -90 Prem ium
Rear A xle
Lubricant
4X 4 (M anual)
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
276
Fluid FordPart Name Application Capacity
E ngine coolant
4
M otorcraft
Prem ium G old
E ngine Coolant
(yellow -colored)
2.3L I4 engine
w ith m anual
transaxle
5.3 quarts
(5.0L)
2.3L I4 engine
w ith autom atic
transaxle
6.3 quarts
(6.0L)
3.0L V6 D uratec
engine w ith
autom atic
transaxle
10.6 quarts
(10.0L)
Rear axle
lubricant
M otorcraft SA E
80W -90 Prem ium
Rear A xle
Lubricant
4X 4
2.96 pints
(1.4L)
5
W indshield
w asher fluid
M otorcraft
Prem ium
W indshield
W asher
Concentrate
A ll
2.7 quarts
(2.6L)
1
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluidis used.
Transmission fluidrequirements are indicatedon the dipstick
blade. MERCON andMERCON Vare not interchangeable. DO
NOT mix MERCON andMERCON V. Refer to your scheduled
maintenance information to determine the correct service
interval.
2
Service refillcapacity is determ ined by filling the transm ission to the
bottom ofthe filler hole w ith the vehicle on a levelsurface.
3
Indicates only approxim ate dry-fillcapacity.Som e applications m ay vary
based on cooler size and ifequipped w ith an in-tank cooler.The am ount
oftransm ission fluid and fluid levelshould be set by the indication on
the dipsticks norm aloperating range.
4
A dd the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
5
Fillto 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch (6 m m to 14 m m ) below bottom offillhole.
6
U se ofsynthetic or synthetic blend m otor oilis not m andatory.E ngine
oilneed only m eet the requirem ents ofFord specification
W SS-M 2C930-A and the A PICertification m ark.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
277
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Item FordPart
Name or
equivalent
FordPart
Number
Ford
Specification
Body hinges,
latches,door
striker plates
and rollers,seat
tracks,fuelfiller
door hinge and
spring,prim ary
and auxiliary
hood latches
M ulti-Purpose
G rease
X G -4 or X L-5 E SB-M 1C93-B
Brake fluid (and
clutch fluid if
equipped)
M otorcraft H igh
Perform ance
D O T 3 M otor
Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM -1 E SA -M 6C25-A
H alfshaft CV
joints
M otorcraft
Constant
Velocity Joint
G rease
X G -5 W SS-M 1C258A 1
E ngine coolant
1
M otorcraft
Prem ium G old
E ngine Coolant
(yellow -colored)
VC-7A (U .S.,
except CA ,O R
and N M ),
VC-7B (CA ,O R
and N M )
W SS-M 97B51-A 1
E ngine oil M otorcraft SA E
5W -20 Prem ium
Synthetic Blend
M otor O il(U S)
M otorcraft SA E
5W -20 Super
Prem ium M otor
O il(Canada)
X O -5W 20-Q SP
(U S)
CX O -5W 20LSP12
(Canada)
W SS-M 2C930-A
w ith A PI
Certification
M ark
M anualtransaxle M otorcraft SA E
75W -90 G ear O il
F32Z-19C547M A W SS-M 2C203-A 1
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
278
Item FordPart
Name or
equivalent
FordPart
Number
Ford
Specification
A utom atic
transaxle
2
M otorcraft
M E RCO N ATF
X T-2-Q D X M E RCO N
Pow er steering
fluid
M otorcraft
M E RCO N ATF
Rear axle (4X 4)
4
M otorcraft SA E
80W -90
Prem ium Rear
A xle Lubricant
X Y-80W 90-Q L W SP-M 2C197-A
Pow er Transfer
U nit
(4X 4-M anual
Transaxle)
Pow er Transfer
U nit
(4X 4-A utom atic
Transaxle)
3
M otorcraft SA E
75W -140 H igh
Perform ance
Synthetic Rear
A xle Lubricant
X Y-75W 140Q L W SL-M 2C192-A
W indshield
w asher fluid
M otorcraft
Prem ium
W indshield
W asher
Concentrate
ZC-32A W SB-M 8B16A 2
1
D O N O T U SE M otorcraft Specialty O range E ngine Coolant VC-2.Refer
to Addi ng engi ne coolant, in thi s chapter.
2
E nsure the correct autom atic transm ission fluid is used.Transm ission
fluid requirem ents are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick
handle.M E RCO N and M E RCO N V are not interchangeable.D O N O T
m ix M E RCO N and M E RCO N V.Refer to your scheduled mai ntenance
i nformati on to determ ine the correct service interval.
3
The Pow er Transfer U nit is lubricated for life w ith synthetic lube.
Lubricant levels are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or repair required.Replace Pow er Transfer U nit lubricant w ith
specified synthetic lubricant anytim e the unit is subm erged in w ater.
4
4X 4 vehicles exposed for prolonged periods to tem peratures less than
40 F (-40 C) should change out the rear axle fluid to M otorcraft SA E
75W -140 Synthetic Rear A xle Lubricant,Ford part num ber
X Y-75W 140Q L m eeting Ford specification W SL-M 2C192A .
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
279
ENGINE DATA
Engine 2.3L I4 engine 3.0L DOHC V6
Duratec engine
Cubic inches 140 183
Required fuel 87 octane 87 octane
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-4-2-5-3-6
Ignition system Coilon plug Coilon plug
Spark plug gap 0.0490.053 inch
(1.251.35m m )
0.0520.056 inch
(1.321.42m m )
Com pression ratio 9.7:1 10.0:1
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS
Dimensions 4Door - inches (mm)
(1) Vehicle height w ithout roofrack* 67.6 (1718)
(1) Vehicle height w ith roofrack* 69.7 (1770)
(2) Front tread /Rear tread* 61.1 (1552) /60.4 (1533)
(3) O verallw idth (body) 70.1 (1780)
(4) W heelbase 103.2 (2620)
(5) O veralllength 174.3 (4442)
* Base vehicle at curb loading
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
280
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
281
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The N ationalH ighw ay Traffic Safety
A dm inistration Regulations require
that a Safety Com pliance
Certification Labelbe affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe w here the
Safety Com pliance Certification
Labelm ay be located.The Safety
Com pliance Certification Labelis
located on the structure by the
trailing edge ofthe drivers door or
the edge ofthe drivers door.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
282
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification num ber is
attached to a m etaltag and is
located on the driver side
instrum ent panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
X X X X is representative ofyour
vehicle identification num ber.
The Vehicle Identification N um ber (VIN ) contains the follow ing
inform ation:
1.W orld m anufacturer identifier
2.Brake type and G ross Vehicle
W eight Rating (G VW R)
3.Vehicle line,series,body type
4.E ngine type
5.Check digit
6.M odelyear
7.A ssem bly plant
8.Production sequence num ber
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
283
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a
transm ission/transaxle code on the
Safety Com pliance Certification
Label.The follow ing table tells you
w hich transm ission or transaxle
each code represents.
Description Code
Five-speed m anual 3
Four-speed autom atic 4
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
284
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A w ide selection ofG enuine Ford A ccessories are available for your
vehicle through your localauthorized Ford or Ford ofCanada dealer.
These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfillyour
autom otive needs;they are custom designed to com plem ent the style
and aerodynam ic appearance ofyour vehicle.In addition,each accessory
is m ade from high quality m aterials and m eets or exceeds Fords rigorous
engineering and safety specifications.Ford M otor Com pany w illrepair or
replace any properly authorized dealer-installed G enuine Ford A ccessory
found to be defective in factory-supplied m aterials or w orkm anship
during the w arranty period,as w ellas any com ponent dam aged by the
defective accessory.The accessory w illbe w arranted for w hichever
provides you the greatest benefit:
12 m onths or 12,000 m iles (20,000 km ) (w hichever occurs first),or
the rem ainder ofyour new vehicle lim ited w arranty.
This m eans that G enuine Ford A ccessories purchased along w ith your
new vehicle and installed by an authorized dealer are covered for the full
length ofyour N ew Vehicles Lim ited W arranty 3 years or 36,000 m iles
(60,000 km ) (w hichever occurs first).Contact your authorized dealer for
details and a copy ofthe w arranty.
Not all accessories are available for all models.
The follow ing is a list ofseveralG enuine Ford A ccessory products.N ot
allaccessories are available for allm odels.For a com plete listing ofthe
accessories that are available for your vehicle,please contact your
authorized dealer or visit our online store at:
w w w.fordaccessoriesstore.com .
Exterior style
Bug shields
D eflectors
Running boards
Splash guards
Step Bars
Interior style
E lectrochrom atic com pass/tem perature interior m irrors
Floor m ats
Scuffplates
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Accessories
285
Lifestyle
Cargo organization and m anagem ent
M obile-E ase hands-free com m unication system
Rear seat entertainm ent system s
Trailer hitches,w iring harnesses and accessories
Peace of mind
Locking gas cap
Rem ote start
Vehicle security system s
For m axim um vehicle perform ance,keep the follow ing inform ation in
m ind w hen adding accessories or equipm ent to your vehicle:
W hen adding accessories,equipm ent,passengers and luggage to your
vehicle,do not exceed the totalw eight capacity ofthe vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (G VW R or G AW R as indicated on the Safety
Com pliance Certification label).Consult your authorized dealer for
specific w eight inform ation.
The FederalCom m unications Com m ission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecom m unications Com m ission (CRTC) regulate the use ofm obile
com m unications system s such as tw o-w ay radios,telephones and
theft alarm s - that are equipped w ith radio transm itters.A ny such
equipm ent installed in your vehicle should com ply w ith FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
M obile com m unications system s m ay harm the operation ofyour
vehicle,particularly ifthey are not properly designed for autom otive
use.
To avoid interference w ith other vehicle functions,such as anti-lock
braking system s,am ateur radio users w ho installradios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the A m ateur Radio A ntennas in
the area ofthe drivers side hood.
E lectricalor electronic accessories or com ponents that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the ow ner m ay adversely affect
battery perform ance and durability.
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Accessories
286
A
A ccessory delay ..........................56
A ir cleaner filter ...............273,275
A irbag supplem entalrestraint
system ........................112,121,124
and child safety seats ............114
description ..............112,121,124
disposal....................................127
driver airbag ............114,122,125
indicator light .........121,123,126
operation .................114,122,125
passenger airbag .....114,122,125
side airbag ...............................121
A llW heelD rive (AW D ),
driving offroad .........................192
A m bulance packages ....................7
A ntifreeze
(see E ngine coolant) ................253
A nti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................179
A nti-theft system ..................84,87
arm ing the system ....................87
disarm ing a triggered system ..88
triggering ...................................88
A udio system
(see Radio) ......................17,26,31
A utom atic transaxle
fluid,adding ............................270
fluid,checking ........................270
A utom atic transm ission ............182
driving an autom atic
overdrive .................................184
fluid,refillcapacities ..............276
fluid,specification ..................280
A uxiliary pow er point .................55
A xle
lubricant specifications ..278,280
refillcapacities ........................276
B
Battery .......................................251
acid,treating em ergencies .....251
battery saver .............................47
jum ping a disabled battery ....220
m aintenance-free ....................251
replacem ent,specifications ...275
servicing ..................................251
BeltM inder .................................107
Brakes ................................178179
anti-lock ...................................179
anti-lock brake system (A BS)
w arning light ...........................179
fluid,checking and adding ....270
fluid,specifications .........278,280
parking ....................................180
shift interlock ..........................182
Bulbs ............................................47
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....276
Cargo area shade ........................71
Cargo cover .................................72
Cellphone use ..............................7
Child safety restraints ..............127
child safety belts ....................127
Child safety seats ......................131
attaching w ith tether straps ..135
in front seat ............................132
in rear seat ..............................132
Cleaning your vehicle
engine com partm ent ..............236
instrum ent panel ....................238
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Index
287
interior .....................................239
interior trim ............................239
plastic parts ............................237
w ashing ....................................235
w axing .....................................235
w heels ......................................236
w iper blades ............................238
Clim ate control(see A ir
conditioning or H eating) ......3839
Clock ............................................32
Clock adjust
6-CD in dash .......................20,24
A M /FM /CD .................................28
A M /FM /Tape/CD .......................32
Single CD ..................................28
Clutch
fluid ..........................................270
operation w hile driving ..........187
recom m ended shift speeds ....188
Console ........................................54
overhead ....................................54
Controls
pow er seat .................................90
Coolant
checking and adding ..............253
refillcapacities ................256,276
specifications ..................278,280
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ....................58
Custom er A ssistance ................200
Ford E xtended Service
Plan ..........................................232
G etting assistance outside
the U .S.and Canada ..............233
G etting roadside assistance ...200
G etting the service you
need .........................................228
O rdering additionalow ners
literature .................................233
U tilizing the
M ediation/A rbitration
Program ...................................231
D
D aytim e running lam ps
(see Lam ps) ................................43
D efrost
rear w indow ..............................40
D ipstick
autom atic transm ission
fluid ..........................................270
engine oil.................................247
D oors
lubricant specifications ..........278
D riving under special
conditions ..................186,194,197
sand .........................................195
snow and ice ...........................198
through w ater .................196,199
E
E lectronic m essage center .........62
E m ergencies,roadside
jum p-starting ..........................220
E m ission controlsystem ..........267
E ngine ........................................280
cleaning ...................................236
coolant .....................................253
fail-safe cooling .......................257
idle speed control...................251
lubrication specifications ......278,
280
service points ..................244245
starting after a collision .........202
E ngine block heater .................178
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Index
288
E ngine oil ..................................247
checking and adding ..............247
dipstick ....................................247
filter,specifications ........250,275
recom m endations ...................250
specifications ..................278,280
E xhaust fum es ..........................178
F
Failsafe cooling ........................257
Fluid capacities .........................276
Foglam ps .....................................44
Four-W heelD rive vehicles
driving offroad .......................193
indicator light .........................192
preparing to drive your
vehicle .....................................181
Fuel ............................................259
calculating fuel
econom y ............................63,264
cap ...........................................261
capacity ...................................276
choosing the right fuel...........262
com parisons w ith E PA fuel
econom y estim ates .................267
detergent in fuel.....................263
filling your vehicle
w ith fuel ..................259,261,264
filter,specifications ........259,275
fuelpum p shut-offsw itch .....202
im proving fueleconom y ........264
octane rating ...................263,280
quality ......................................263
running out offuel .................263
safety inform ation relating
to autom otive fuels ................259
Fuses ..................................202,204
G
G as cap (see Fuelcap) ............261
G as m ileage
(see Fueleconom y) .................264
G auges .........................................15
H
H azard flashers .........................201
H ead restraints .....................89,92
H eadlam ps ...................................41
aim ing ........................................44
autolam p system .......................41
bulb specifications ....................48
daytim e running lights .............43
flash to pass ..............................43
high beam .................................42
replacing bulbs .........................48
turning on and off ....................41
H eating
heater only system ...................38
H ood ..........................................243
I
Ignition ...............................175,280
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................131
Inspection/m aintenance (I/M )
testing ........................................269
Instrum ent panel
cleaning ...................................238
cluster ........................................10
lighting up paneland
interior .......................................44
J
Jum p-starting your vehicle ......220
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Index
289
K
K eyless entry system .................83
autolock .....................................76
keypad .......................................83
locking and unlocking doors ....84
program m ing entry code .........83
K eys .............................................85
positions ofthe ignition .........175
L
Lam ps
autolam p system .......................41
bulb replacem ent
specifications chart ..................48
daytim e running light ...............43
fog lam ps ...................................44
headlam ps .................................41
headlam ps,flash to pass ..........43
instrum ent panel,dim m ing .....44
interior lam ps .....................4648
replacing bulbs .........................48
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................46
Liftgate ........................................70
Lights,w arning and indicator ....10
anti-lock brakes (A BS) ..........179
Load lim its .................................162
Loading instructions .................169
Locks
autolock .....................................76
childproof ..................................78
Lubricant specifications ...278,280
Lug nuts ....................................220
Luggage rack ...............................72
M
M anualtransaxle .......................187
reverse .....................................188
M anualtransm ission
fluid capacities ........................276
lubricant specifications ..........280
M essage center ...........................62
english/m etric button ...............64
system check button ................64
w arning m essages .....................66
M irrors ...................................54,57
autom atic dim m ing rearview
m irror ........................................57
fold aw ay ...................................58
heated ........................................58
side view m irrors (pow er) .......57
M oon roof ....................................61
M otorcraft parts ........240,259,275
O
O ctane rating ............................263
O il(see E ngine oil) ..................247
O verdrive ...................................183
P
Parking .......................................189
Parking brake ............................180
Parts (see M otorcraft parts) ....275
Passenger O ccupant
Classification Sensor ...................99
Pow er distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................206
Pow er door locks ........................75
Pow er m irrors .............................57
Pow er point .................................55
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Index
290
Pow er steering ..........................180
fluid,refillcapacity ................276
fluid,specifications .........278,280
Pow er W indow s ...........................55
Preparing to drive your
vehicle ........................................181
R
Radio ................................17,26,31
Rear w indow defroster ...............40
Relays ........................................202
Rem ote entry system .................78
illum inated entry ................8283
locking/unlocking doors .....7980
panic alarm ...............................80
replacing the batteries .............80
Reverse sensing system ...........190
Roadside assistance ..................200
Roofrack .....................................72
S
Safety Belt M aintenance ..........106
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ....................97,101105
Safety Canopy ...................122,124
Safety defects,reporting ..........234
Safety restraints ..........97,101105
belt m inder .............................107
extension assem bly ................106
for adults .........................102104
for children .............................127
O ccupant Classification
Sensor ........................................99
safety belt m aintenance .........106
w arning light and chim e ........107
Safety seats for children ..........131
Safety Com pliance
Certification Label ....................282
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) ...............97
Seats ............................................89
child safety seats ....................131
heated ........................................92
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ..........................................84
Servicing your vehicle ..............242
Setting the clock
A M /FM /In-dash 6 CD ..........20,24
A M /FM /Tape/CD .......................32
Snow plow ing .................................7
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................275,280
Specialnotice
am bulance conversions ..............7
utility-type vehicles ....................6
Specification chart,
lubricants ...........................278,280
Speed control ..............................58
Starting your vehicle ........175177
jum p starting ..........................220
Steering w heel
tilting .........................................53
T
Tem perature control
(see Clim ate control) .................38
Tilt steering w heel ......................53
Tire Pressure M onitoring
System (TPM S)
Tires,W heels and Loading ....156
W arning D isplays ......................15
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Index
291
Tires ...................................141142
alignm ent ................................149
care ..........................................145
changing ..................................211
checking the pressure ............145
inflating ...................................143
label .........................................155
replacing ..................................147
rotating ....................................149
safety practices .......................148
sidew allinform ation ...............150
snow tires and chains ............161
spare tire .........................209,211
term inology .............................142
tire grades ...............................142
treadw ear ........................141,146
Tow ing .......................................169
recreationaltow ing .................174
trailer tow ing ..........................169
w recker ....................................226
Transaxle
fluid,checking and adding
(m anual) .................................273
m anualoperation ....................187
Transm ission
autom atic operation ...............182
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....182
fluid,checking and adding
(autom atic) .............................270
Turn signal ..................................46
V
Vehicle dim ensions ...................280
Vehicle Identification N um ber
(VIN ) ..........................................283
Vehicle loading ..........................162
Ventilating your vehicle ...........178
W
W arning lights (see Lights) .......10
W asher fluid ..............................246
W ater,D riving through .............199
W indow s
pow er .........................................55
rear w iper/w asher .....................53
W indshield w asher fluid and
w ipers
checking and adding fluid .....246
liftgate reservoir .....................246
operation ...................................52
replacing w iper blades ...........247
W recker tow ing .........................226
2006 Escape (204)
USA (fus)
Index
292
293
294
295
296

Escape Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Escape Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Introduction 4

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen